introduction - american honda motor...

268
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so you can refer to it at any time. Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities. As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment. Maintaining your vehicle according to the messages shown on the information display helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns. Congratulations on your selection of the 2008 Honda S2000. We are certain you will be pleased with your purchase of one of the most sophisticated and technologically-advanced sports cars in the world. Introduction i 2008 S2000

Upload: others

Post on 12-Jun-2020

0 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the messages shown on theinformation display helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and willbe pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations on your selection of the 2008 Honda S2000. We are certainyou will be pleased with your purchase of one of the most sophisticated andtechnologically-advanced sports cars in the world.

Introduction

i

07/07/25 17:27:07 31S2A680 0002 

2008 S2000

Page 2: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

07/07/25 17:27:11 31S2A680 0003 

2008 S2000

Page 3: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

--

--

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

on the vehicle.

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

07/07/25 17:27:22 31S2A680 0004 

2008 S2000

Page 4: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

2008 S2000 Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3 Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5 Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard and steering column) .................................... 43 Features (heating and cooling ,audio,steering wheel, and cruise control) ...................................................... 95 Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ...................................................................... 127 Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 143 Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 159 Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses) ..................................... 199 Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 231 Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 247 Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ......................................................................................... 251 Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

1 00X31-S2A-6800

Page 5: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Maintenance

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

Technical Information

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Overview of Contents

2

07/07/25 17:27:51 31S2A680 0007 

2008 S2000

Page 6: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

* If equipped:

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

3

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

MANUALTRANSMISSION

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

(P.46)

POWER DOORLOCK

(P.26)

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

(P.9, 20) (P.9, 20)

AUDIO SYSTEM

ROOF SWITCH

MIRRORCONTROLS

(P.53)

(P.65)

(P.70)

(P.87)

(P.73) (P.61)

(P.60)

(P.147)

(P.104)

U.S. S2000 model is shown.

07/07/25 17:27:58 31S2A680 0008 

2008 S2000

Page 7: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

**

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped

1 :2 :

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

CRUISE BUTTON

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

ENGINE START BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTON

HORN

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

(P.59)

(P.122)

(P.146)

(P.130) (P.124) (P.124)

(P.58)

(P.96, 100)

(P.153)(P.56) (P.60)

1

2

2

07/07/25 17:28:05 31S2A680 0009 

2008 S2000

Page 8: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 10.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 10

......................2. Adjust the Seats . 10............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 11

4. Fasten and Position the.............................Seat Belts . 12

5. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 13

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 14...Additional Safety Precautions . 15

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 16

..Seat Belt System Components . 16......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 18

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 18Additional Information About Your

.....................................Airbags . 20......Airbag System Components . 20

...........How Your Airbags Work . 22..How the SRS Indicator Works . 25

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 26

.............................Airbag Service . 27...Additional Safety Precautions . 28

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 29

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 29

Your Vehicle is NotRecommended for Child

..........................Passengers . 30The Passenger’s Airbag

.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 30...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

.............Protecting Small Children . 33.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 34....................Installing a Child Seat . 34

...........Protecting Larger Children . 37...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 37

..................Using a Booster Seat . 38When Can a Larger Child Ride

........................in This Vehicle . 39...Additional Safety Precautions . 40

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 41...................................Safety Labels . 42

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passenger. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains how yourairbags work, and it tells you how toproperly restrain children in yourvehicle.

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

5

07/07/25 17:28:09 31S2A680 0010 

2008 S2000

Page 9: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengeralways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Since all children are safest in theback seat of a vehicle, and yourvehicle does not have a back seat, werecommend that you do not carry achild passenger.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

If an older child must ride in thisvehicle, follow all child safetyinstructions and warnings in thismanual (see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

12

29 40

161

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Your Vehicle is NotRecommended for ChildPassengers

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Never carry an infant in a rear-facingchild seat in this vehicle.

6

07/07/25 17:28:20 31S2A680 0011 

2008 S2000

Page 10: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengerduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the seatbelts in a crash.

However, you and your passengercan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passenger.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(8)

(1) (9) (3) (4) (7) (6)

(2)

(5)

(2)

(8)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Seat Belt Tensioners(8) Front Airbags(9) Door Locks

07/07/25 17:28:27 31S2A680 0012 

2008 S2000

Page 11: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in both seating positions.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Seat belts have proven to be thesingle most effective safety devicefor adults and larger children.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against a passenger.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What you should do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassenger always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

07/07/25 17:28:38 31S2A680 0013 

2008 S2000

Page 12: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a passengerduring a moderate to severe frontalcollision (see page for moreinformation on how your airbagswork).

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Apassenger should move the seat asfar back from the dashboard aspossible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

22

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

What you should do:

Airbags offer no protection in sideimpacts, rear impacts, rollovers,or minor frontal collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

07/07/25 17:28:46 31S2A680 0014 

2008 S2000

Page 13: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a passenger adjust his or herseat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent a passenger fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the door-open indicator works.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, an adultpassenger or teenage child largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in your vehicle. See pages

for important guidelines onhow to properly protect a child in aforward-facing child seat or a largerchild passenger.

Your vehicle has door and trunkopen indicators on the instrumentpanel to indicate when either door orthe trunk is not tightly closed.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

40

47

29

65

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the SeatsIntroduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

10

07/07/25 17:28:56 31S2A680 0015 

2008 S2000

Page 14: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest.

A passenger should also adjust theirseat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust theseats.

69

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

07/07/25 17:29:04 31S2A680 0016 

2008 S2000

Page 15: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

69

Protecting Adults and Teens

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

4.

12

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

07/07/25 17:29:11 31S2A680 0017 

2008 S2000

Page 16: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

After occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the shoulderbelt again to remove any slack, thencheck that the belt rests across thecenter of your chest and over yourshoulder. This spreads the forces ofa crash over the strongest bones inyour upper body.

16

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

5.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

07/07/25 17:29:19 31S2A680 0018 

2008 S2000

Page 17: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a passenger, adjust the seat as farback as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition can be seriously or fatallyinjured in a crash by striking interiorparts of the vehicle or being struckby an inflating front airbag.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Advice for Pregnant Women

14

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

07/07/25 17:29:26 31S2A680 0019 

2008 S2000

Page 18: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Objects on thecovers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe airbag covers.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

15

07/07/25 17:29:32 31S2A680 0020 

2008 S2000

Page 19: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in both seatingpositions. The seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the seat belts are latched orunlatched, and how much weight ison the passenger’s seat (see page

).

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passenger tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the seat belts.If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before your seatbelt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened before

the beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a passenger does not fasten theirseat belt, the indicator will come onabout 6 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON (II)position.

If either the driver or passenger doesnot fasten their seat belt, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

When no one is sitting in thepassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is nopassenger and no items on thepassenger’s seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

Any objects hanging on the seat.

Any items under the passenger’sseat.

24

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

16

07/07/25 17:29:42 31S2A680 0021 

2008 S2000

Page 20: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

Both seat belts have an emergencyretractor. In normal driving, theretractor lets you move freely in yourseat while it keeps some tension onthe belt. During a collision or suddenstop, the retractor automaticallylocks the belt to help restrain yourbody.

The passenger’s seat belt has alockable retractor that must beactivated to secure a forward-facingchild seat (see page ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

12

34

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

07/07/25 17:29:49 31S2A680 0022 

2008 S2000

Page 21: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

For added protection, the seat beltsare equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners. When activated, thetensioners immediately tighten thebelts to help hold the driver and apassenger in place.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning it maycorrect the problem (see page ).Any belt that is not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

However, the tensioners can beactivated during a collision in whichthe airbags do not deploy. In thiscase, the airbags would not beneeded, but the additional restraintcould be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

184

HondaWarranty Information

Seat Belt MaintenanceAutomatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

18

07/07/25 17:29:58 31S2A680 0023 

2008 S2000

Page 22: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

07/07/25 17:30:02 31S2A680 0024 

2008 S2000

Page 23: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

20

(1)

(2)

(3)

(7)

(8)

(6)

(4)

(5)

(4)

(6)

(9)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(6) Passenger’s Weight Sensors(7) Passenger’s Weight Sensor Unit(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

07/07/25 17:30:07 31S2A680 0025 

2008 S2000

Page 24: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Your airbag system includes: An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sairbag has been turned off (seepage ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the passenger’s seat. Ifthe weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg)or less (the weight of an infant orsmall child), the passenger’sairbag will be turned off (see page

).

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the passenger’sairbag is stored in the dashboard.Both are marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’(see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the airbag. If the seat is toofar forward, the airbag will inflatewith less force (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and thepassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact.

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

26

24

25

18

24

16

22

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

07/07/25 17:30:16 31S2A680 0026 

2008 S2000

Page 25: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and passenger’sairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in thepassenger’s seat, or if the advancedairbag system has turned thepassenger’s airbag off (see page ).

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

24

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Airbags Work

22

07/07/25 17:30:25 31S2A680 0027 

2008 S2000

Page 26: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched

latched

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

07/07/25 17:30:33 31S2A680 0028 

2008 S2000

Page 27: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

Your airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in the passenger’sseat.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the seats.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

The passenger’s advanced airbagsystem has weight sensors under theseat. Although Honda does notencourage carrying a child in thepassenger’s seat, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child (up to about 65 lbs or 29kg), the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s airbag off.

Advanced Airbags

Additional Information About Your Airbags

24

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

07/07/25 17:30:42 31S2A680 0029 

2008 S2000

Page 28: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the seat, the airbagwill be off. However, the passengerairbag off indicator will not come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced airbag system will workproperly, The SRS indicator alerts you to a

potential problem with your airbagsor seat belt tensioners.

26

Additional Information About Your Airbags

do not do anything thatwould increase or decrease theweight on the passenger’s seat, suchas hanging heavy objects on the seat.

How the SRS IndicatorWorks

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

07/07/25 17:30:51 31S2A680 0030 

2008 S2000

Page 29: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can cause theindicator to come on.

If no weight is detected in thepassenger’s seat, the airbag will beautomatically shut off. However, theindicator will not come on.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s airbag has been shut offbecause weight sensors detect about65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight ofan infant or small child) on thepassenger’s seat. It doesthere is a problem with the airbag.

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

Additional Information About Your Airbags

not mean

26

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U. S. CanadaIgnoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

07/07/25 17:30:59 31S2A680 0031 

2008 S2000

Page 30: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If the indicator comes on with nopassenger and no objects on thepassenger seat, or with an adultriding there, something may beinterfering with the weight sensors.Look for and remove:

Any items under the passenger’sseat.

Any objects hanging on the seat.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:If an adult or teenage passenger is

riding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

An airbag ever inflates.

Airbag Service

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

07/07/25 17:31:08 31S2A680 0032 

2008 S2000

Page 31: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

This could make the driver’s seatposition sensor or the passenger’sweight sensors ineffective. If it isnecessary to remove or modify aseat to accommodate a personwith disabilities, first contactHonda Automobile CustomerService at (800) 999-1009.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the passenger’sweight sensors, the seat belttensioners, and all seat belts wornduring the crash to make surethey are operating properly.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem. Do not attempt to deactivate your

airbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not remove or modify a seatwithout consulting your dealer.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Additional Safety Precautions

Additional Information About Your Airbags

28

07/07/25 17:31:14 31S2A680 0033 

2008 S2000

Page 32: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

(see pages ).

If you ever need to drive with a childin your vehicle, be sure to read thissection. It begins with importantgeneral guidelines, then presentsspecial information for smallchildren who must ride in a forward-facing child seat, and for largerchildren.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatchildren be properly restrained whenthey ride in a vehicle.

(see pages).33 36

37 40properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt must be restrained in anapproved child seat that is properlysecured to the vehicle

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

07/07/25 17:31:21 31S2A680 0034 

2008 S2000

Page 33: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If the airbag inflates, itcan hit the back of the child seatwith enough force to kill or veryseriously injure an infant.

If a larger child must ride inthis vehicle, see page forimportant guidelines on how todecide when a child is ready to ridein the passenger’s seat and how toproperly protect the child.

Airbags have been designed to helpprotect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s airbag is quite large,and it can inflate with enough forceto cause very serious injuries.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sairbag off (see page ), pleasefollow these guidelines:

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to kill or veryseriously injure a small child.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children aged 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

Since this vehicle does not have aback seat, we strongly recommendthat you do not carry any child whois not large enough or matureenough to ride in front (see page ).

37

24

37

Your Vehicle is NotRecommended for ChildPassengers

The Passenger’s Airbag Can PoseSerious Risks

Small Children

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthis vehicle.

Infants

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sairbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe passenger’s seat can behazardous.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

30

07/07/25 17:31:30 31S2A680 0035 

2008 S2000

Page 34: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

To remind you of the passenger’sairbag hazards, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the driver’s andpassenger’s visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

31

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

07/07/25 17:31:42 31S2A680 0036 

2008 S2000

Page 35: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

For example, a small child left in avehicle on a hot day can die fromheatstroke. A child left alone withthe key in the ignition switch canaccidentally set the vehicle inmotion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

If you are not wearing a seatbelt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard. If youare wearing a seat belt, the childcan be torn from your arms and beseriously hurt or killed.

66

Additional Safety Precautions

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Lock both doors and the trunkwhen your vehicle is not in use.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never hold a small child on yourlap.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

32

07/07/25 17:31:49 31S2A680 0037 

2008 S2000

Page 36: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Because an inflating airbag canseriously injure or kill small children,we recommend that you do not carrya small child as a passenger in thisvehicle.

If you decide to transport a smallchild in this vehicle, be sure to movethe passenger seat as far to the rearas possible, and follow theinstructions and guidelines in thefollowing pages.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the passenger’s seatcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in thepassenger’s seat, move thevehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

07/07/25 17:31:57 31S2A680 0038 

2008 S2000

Page 37: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Before purchasing a child seat, orusing a previously purchased one, werecommend that you test the seat tomake sure it fits properly in thepassenger’s seat.

After selecting a proper child seat,there are three main steps ininstalling a child seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt. A childwhose seat is not properly securedto the vehicle can be endangeredin a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seatbelt should be installed as firmlyas possible. However, it does notneed to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side movement can be expectedand should not reduce the childseat’s effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, usea different style of child seat thatcan be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa forward-facing child seat.

Selecting a Child Seat Installing a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thepassenger’s seat.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

34

07/07/25 17:32:07 31S2A680 0039 

2008 S2000

Page 38: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

With the child seat in position,route the belt through the childseat according to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

In this vehicle, a forward-facing childseat must be secured to the vehiclewith the lap part of the lap/shoulderbelt. In addition, the lockableretractor must be activated to securea child seat.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position. Moving the seat asfar back as possible reduces thechance of a child being injured orkilled if the passenger’s airbaginflates.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

35

07/07/25 17:32:14 31S2A680 0040 

2008 S2000

Page 39: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

5. 6.

Installing a Child Seat

36

07/07/25 17:32:20 31S2A680 0041 

2008 S2000

Page 40: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit on a booster seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

Since this vehicle does not have aback seat, we recommend that youdo not carry a larger child, age 12 orunder, as a passenger.

However, the following pagesprovide guidelines to help you decidewhen a given child may ride in thisvehicle, and how to properly protectthe child.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

Allowing a larger child age 12 orunder to ride in the vehicle canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in thevehicle, adjust the vehicle seatas far back as possible, use abooster seat if needed, andhave the child sit up properlyand wear the seat belt properly.

07/07/25 17:32:28 31S2A680 0042 

2008 S2000

Page 41: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should use abooster seat until the lap/shoulderbelt fits them properly without thebooster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intend

to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards and that you followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatrides in this vehicle, move thevehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child iswearing the seat belt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

3.

4.

5.

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

38

07/07/25 17:32:37 31S2A680 0043 

2008 S2000

Page 42: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you decide that a child can safelyride in this vehicle, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a booster,the child should not sit in this vehicle.

To safely ride in this vehicle, a childmust be able to follow the rules,including sitting properly, andwearing the seat belt properlythroughout ride.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s airbag inflates in amoderate to severe frontal collision,the airbag can cause serious injuriesto a child who is unrestrained,improperly restrained, sitting tooclose to the airbag, or out of position.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thisvehicle. There are other importantfactors you should consider.

37

When Can a Larger Child Ride inThis Vehicle

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

39

07/07/25 17:32:47 31S2A680 0044 

2008 S2000

Page 43: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Protecting Larger Children

40

07/07/25 17:32:53 31S2A680 0045 

2008 S2000

Page 44: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows,and set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide HazardD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

41

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

07/07/25 17:33:01 31S2A680 0046 

2008 S2000

Page 45: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models Canadian models

U.S. models only

U.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels

42

BATTERY

SUN VISOR

RADIATOR

DASHBOARD

HOOD

07/07/25 17:33:24 31S2A680 0047 

2008 S2000

Page 46: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 44............................Instrument Panel . 45

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 46.............................................Gauges . 53

.....................................Odometer . 53....................................Trip meter . 53

...............................Select Button . 53..................................Fuel Gauge . 54

..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 54...................Temperature Gauge . 55

Outside Temperature...................................Indicator . 55

..................Maintenance Minder . 56............................................Clock . 56

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 57

Windshield Wipers and.......................................Washers . 58

...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 59........Instrument Panel Brightness . 60

.................Hazard Warning Button . 60

.................Rear Window Defogger . 61...............................Keys and Locks . 62

........................Immobilizer System . 63................................Ignition Switch . 64

..........................Power Door Locks . 65

................................................Trunk . 65........Emergency Trunk Opener . 66

.......................Remote Transmitter . 67.................................................Seats . 69

..............................Power Windows . 70

..............................Convertible Top . 72........................Removable Hardtop . 78

.............................................Mirrors . 87.................................Parking Brake . 88

...........Interior Convenience Items . 89.........................Beverage Holder . 90

...........Accessory Power Socket . 90.............Console Compartments . 91

.................................Audio Panel . 91..........Dashboard Lower Pocket . 92

...................................Interior Light . 92

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

43

07/07/25 17:33:28 31S2A680 0048 

2008 S2000

Page 47: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

* If equipped.:

Control Locations

44

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

POWER DOORLOCK

PARKING BRAKE

MANUALTRANSMISSION

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS

AUDIO SYSTEM

ROOF SWITCH

MIRRORCONTROLS

(P.130)

(P.65)

(P.70)

(P.87)

(P.147) (P.73)

U.S. S2000 model is shown.

(P.90) (P.61)

(P.60)

(P.88)

(P.104)

(P.124)

(P.96, 100)

07/07/25 17:33:35 31S2A680 0049 

2008 S2000

Page 48: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

**

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.1 :2 : Only on CR models. CR models are not available in Canada.

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

45

TRUNK-OPEN INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM (ABS)INDICATOR

DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.50)

(P.50)

(P.47)

(P.46)

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.47)

(P.47)

(P.47)

(P.49)

(P.47)

(P.48)

(P.49)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATORTURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNINGINDICATORS

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P.50)

INFORMATION DISPLAY

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

TPMS INDICATOR

(P.48)

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHTS INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

(P.49)

LOW FUELINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

ELECTRICPOWERSTEERING (EPS)INDICATOR(P.48)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.51)

(P.51)

(P.52)PEAK POWER INDICATOR

(P.53, 161)

(P.55)

(P.46, 220)

(P.46, 218)

(P.46, 218)

(P.47, 219)

1

2

07/07/25 17:33:45 31S2A680 0050 

2008 S2000

Page 49: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

If your passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator comeson about 6 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON (II)position.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassenger to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you and yourpassenger have not fastened yourseat belts.

2.

1.

16

218

218

220

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

46

U.S. Canada

07/07/25 17:33:55 31S2A680 0051 

2008 S2000

Page 50: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

See page .

This indicator comes on if the trunklid is not closed tightly.

This indicator comes on if eitherdoor is not closed tightly.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when you push theSTART button. If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe ABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your airbags.This indicator will also alert you to apotential problem with yourautomatic seat belt tensioners,driver’s seat position sensor, or thepassenger’s seat weight sensors. Formore information, see page .25

150

124

219

Instrument Panel Indicators

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Trunk-open Indicator

Door-open Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

47

07/07/25 17:34:05 31S2A680 0052 

2008 S2000

Page 51: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the high beam headlight’s circuit.Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer.

Driving with the power steeringsystem continuously overheating cancause system damage.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicator does notblink or blinks rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsblink. All turn signals on the outsideof the vehicle should flash.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition to the ON(II) position and goes off after theengine starts. If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in theelectric power steering system. Ifthis happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will not turnoff immediately. If it does not go offafter driving a short distance, orcomes on again while driving, takethe vehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With the indicator on, theEPS may be turned off, making thevehicle harder to steer.

If the power steering systemoverheats while driving, the assist isreduced and steering may feelslightly harder.

181

Instrument Panel Indicators

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

48

07/07/25 17:34:13 31S2A680 0053 

2008 S2000

Page 52: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willthen go off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink, and the enginewill not start (see page ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

When the daytime running lights(DRL) are on, this indicator comeson with reduced brightness.

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 2.22 US gal (8.4 ) of fuelremaining in the tank before thereading reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the reading does reach E.

59

63

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Fuel IndicatorImmobilizer SystemIndicator

High Beam Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

49

07/07/25 17:34:21 31S2A680 0054 

2008 S2000

Page 53: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance. Themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theinformation display. See page formore information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

1.

2.

3.

152

152

152

161

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Maintenance MinderIndicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

50

07/07/25 17:34:32 31S2A680 0055 

2008 S2000

Page 54: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition to the ON (II) position.If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). Refer to page

for more information.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,repair the flat tire with the tire repairkit (see page ), and have the flattire repaired as soon as possible. Iftwo or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). Refer to page

for more information.

201

154

154

228

228

206

CR models

Except CR models

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

51

07/07/26 09:33:07 31S2A680 0056 

2008 S2000

Page 55: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This indicator show the rpm rangewhere peak power occurs.

When it is flashing, engine speedis approaching the maximumpower range.

When it stays on, the engine speedis in the maximum power range.

When the tachometer readingreaches the red zone, thisindicator goes out and the redzone starts flashing.

See page for recommended shiftpoints.

148

CR models

Instrument Panel Indicators

Peak Power Indicator

52

PEAK POWERINDICATOR

07/07/25 17:34:47 31S2A680 0057 

2008 S2000

Page 56: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

- +

The trip meter shows the number ofmiles or kilometers driven since youlast reset it.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the TRIP buttonuntil you hear a beep and thenumber resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

The select button switches thespeedometer reading between milesper hour and kilometers per hour. Italso changes the odometer and tripmeters to read in miles or kilometerscorrespondingly. To change thereadings, push the SELECT button,and hold it until you hear a beep.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the TRIP buttonrepeatedly. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

Odometer Trip Meter

Select Button

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

53

TACHOMETER

TRIP METER

SELECT BUTTON

CLOCK

CLOCK BUTTON

TRIP BUTTON

SPEEDOMETER

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

BUTTON

ODOMETER/CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR

BUTTON

07/07/25 17:34:57 31S2A680 0058 

2008 S2000

Page 57: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount.

Your vehicle’s on board diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the trip button. The‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message willappear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

If the system still detects a leak inthe vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .219

Fuel Gauge Check Fuel Cap Message

Gauges

54

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

07/07/25 17:35:03 31S2A680 0059 

2008 S2000

Page 58: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

- -- - -- - -

± ±

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

To adjust the outside temperatureindicator, make sure the outsidetemperature indicator is shown inthe display, then press and hold theTRIP button for 10 seconds (theTRIP A or B is also reset). Thefollowing sequence will appear for 1second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4,

3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When it reaches the desired value,release the TRIP button. You shouldsee the new outside temperaturedisplayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels).

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the indicatorupdate until it reaches the correctoutside temperature. This may takeseveral minutes.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the reading should be inthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the reading may reach nearthe red mark. If it reaches the red(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side ofthe road. See page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

215

Gauges

Outside Temperature IndicatorTemperature Gauge

Instruments

andC

ontrols

55

07/07/25 17:35:12 31S2A680 0060 

2008 S2000

Page 59: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

+ -

+ -

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

The clock displays the time with theignition switch in the ON (II)position.

To set the clock:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press and hold the CLOCK buttonuntil the minute display blinks.Adjust the minute by pressing the

or button.

When you finish the minuteadjustment, press and release theCLOCK button. The hour displaywill blink. Adjust the hour bypressing the or button.

When you finish your adjustments,press the CLOCK button again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

161

Gauges

Maintenance Minder Clock

56

07/07/25 17:35:19 31S2A680 0061 

2008 S2000

Page 60: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

**

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped.

1 :2 :

Controls Near the Steering WheelInstrum

entsand

Controls

57

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSHEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

ENGINE START BUTTON

HORN

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

CRUISE BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTON

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

(P.59) (P.56)

(P.122)

(P.146)

(P.130)

(P.124) (P.124)

(P.58)

(P.96, 100)

(P.153)

(P.60)

2

2

07/07/25 17:35:26 31S2A680 0062 

2008 S2000

Page 61: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

---

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers operate everyfew seconds. In low speed and highspeed, the wipers run continuously.

The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers run at low speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

MIST

OFF

INT

HI

LO

Windshield Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

58

07/07/25 17:35:33 31S2A680 0063 

2008 S2000

Page 62: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

-Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder buzzerwhen you open the driver’s door.

Turn SignalOffParking and indicator lightsHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beams

Push the leverforward until you hear a click. Thehigh beam indicator will come on(see page ). Pull the lever back toreturn to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

49

Turn Signal

Headlights On

High Beams

Daytime Running Lights

Turn Signals and HeadlightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

07/07/25 17:35:41 31S2A680 0064 

2008 S2000

Page 63: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

+ -

+ -The buttons in the lower left cornerof the instrument panel adjust thebrightness of the display in five steps.Push the or button five timesto see the full range.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to the

or position.

Push the red button next to theparking brake to turn on the hazardwarning lights (four-way flashers).This causes all four outside turnsignals and both indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

Adjust the brightness to the desiredlevel with the headlight switch off,and also with the headlight switch on.Both settings will remain at thoselevels until you change them.

With the headlight switch on, youcan switch the display to full daytimebrightness by pushing and holdingthe button. Push the button toreturn the display to the originalbrightness.

Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

60

07/07/25 17:35:49 31S2A680 0065 

2008 S2000

Page 64: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Do not push the defogger buttonwhen the convertible top is folded.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Rear Window DefoggerInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

07/07/25 17:35:54 31S2A680 0066 

2008 S2000

Page 65: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk and the lower consolecompartment locked when you leaveyour vehicle and the valet key at aparking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a key replaced. Use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle.

Keys and Locks

62

VALET KEY(GREY)

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYS(BLACK)

07/07/25 17:36:02 31S2A680 0067 

2008 S2000

Page 66: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you lose your key and cannot startthe engine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

63

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

07/07/25 17:36:10 31S2A680 0068 

2008 S2000

Page 67: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The ignition switch has threepositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), and ON (II).

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.The engine can be started with thekey in this position by pressing theengine START button (see page

).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power socket in thisposition.

146

ON (II)

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

Ignition Switch

64

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

07/07/25 17:36:18 31S2A680 0069 

2008 S2000

Page 68: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Each door has a lock tab next to theinside door handle. When you pushin the lock tab on the driver’s door,both doors lock. Pulling out the locktab on the driver’s door only unlocksthat door. The lock tab on thepassenger’s door only locks andunlocks that door.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab in and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull outeither the inside or outside doorhandle and push the lock tab in, thenclose the door.

Both doors lock when you use thekey in the driver’s door. Using thekey in the passenger’s door onlylocks and unlocks that door.To unlock only the driver’s doorfrom the outside, insert the key inthe driver’s door lock, turn the keyand release it. If you turn the keyand hold it, both doors will unlock.

To open the trunk, press the trunkrelease button in the lower consolecompartment. To protect items inthe trunk when you need to give thekey to someone else, lock the lowerconsole compartment with themaster key, and give the otherperson the valet key.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

CONTINUED

Power Door Locks Trunk

Power Door Locks, TrunkInstrum

entsand

Controls

65

LOCK TAB

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

Push

07/07/25 17:36:27 31S2A680 0070 

2008 S2000

Page 69: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

You can also use the master key toopen the trunk lock.

To open the trunk with the remotetransmitter, press and hold theTRUNK RELEASE button for about1 second (see page ).

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thelid, and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside. To open the trunk, push therelease lever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature. For more informationabout child safety, see page .

41

32

67

Emergency Trunk Opener

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Trunk

66

MASTER KEY

07/07/25 17:36:34 31S2A680 0071 

2008 S2000

Page 70: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to also unlock the passenger’sdoor.

Press this button once tolock both doors. Some exterior lightswill flash. When you push LOCKtwice within 5 seconds, you will heara beep to verify that the doors arelocked.

The interior light (if the interior light

switch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openeither door within 30 seconds, thelight goes out. If you relock thedoors with the remote transmitterbefore 30 seconds have elapsed, thelight will go off immediately.

If you do not open either door within30 seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock.

You cannot lock or unlock the doorswith the remote transmitter if eitherdoor is not fully closed or the key isin the ignition switch.

Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.You cannot open the trunk if the keyis in the ignition switch.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exterior

lights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

UNLOCK

LOCK

TRUNK

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

Remote Transmitter Care

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

07/07/25 17:36:44 31S2A680 0072 

2008 S2000

Page 71: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

◎▽

To replace the battery, remove theround cover on the back of thetransmitter by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin. Inserta new battery with the side facingup. Align the mark on the coverwith the mark on thetransmitter. Set the cover in place,and turn it clockwise.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.Battery type: CR2025

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

68

BATTERY ROUNDCOVER

07/07/25 17:36:52 31S2A680 0073 

2008 S2000

Page 72: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Thentry to move the seat to make sure itis locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

10 12

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

69

07/07/25 17:36:58 31S2A680 0074 

2008 S2000

Page 73: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower eitherwindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

The driver’s armrest has a masterpower window control panel. Toopen the passenger’s window, pushdown on the switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pullback on the window switch. Releasethe switch when the window gets tothe position you want.

Power Windows

70

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAINSWITCH

PASSENGER’S WINDOW SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passenger isaway from the window beforeclosing it.

07/07/25 17:37:03 31S2A680 0075 

2008 S2000

Page 74: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down to the seconddetent, and release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way down.To stop the window, pull back on thewindow switch briefly.

To open the driver’s window onlypartially, push the window switchdown lightly and hold it. The windowwill stop as soon as you release theswitch.

The AUTO function only works tolower the driver’s window. To raisethe window, you must pull back onthe window switch and hold it untilthe window reaches the desiredposition.

If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger’s window cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have a child in thevehicle so the child does not getinjured by operating the windowunintentionally.

AUTO

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

07/07/25 17:37:08 31S2A680 0076 

2008 S2000

Page 75: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Before operating the convertible top,make sure the vehicle is parked onlevel ground, the rear defogger is off,and there is enough clearance abovethe top.

Apply the parking brake. Theconvertible top will not operateunless the parking brake is fullyengaged.

There is a latch on each side. Pushin the tabs, and pull the lockinglevers down.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

It is advisable to raise the topwhenever you park the vehicle. Thishelps to protect the vehicle fromunexpected weather changes, andfrom theft of your valuables.

The convertible top on your vehiclelowers and raises electrically.

1.

2.3.

Except CR models Lowering the Convertible Top

Convertible Top

72

LATCH TAB

LOCKING LEVER

Park your vehicle in the shadewhenever possible. Extendedexposure to sunlight can cause theconvertible top to deteriorate.

Do not operate the convertible top ifthe vehicle is on a jack, a hoist, or onjack stands.

Never drive the vehicle with theconvertible top half open.

Do not operate the top if it is wet,dirty, or covered with ice or snow.

Do not operate the convertible top inf reezing weather. You can damagethe material and the mechanism.

07/07/25 17:37:18 31S2A680 0077 

2008 S2000

Page 76: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

With the latches released, pushthe locking levers up until theylatch.

Pull back and hold the ROOFswitch. The windows lower andthe roof folds back. Release theROOF switch when the roof isretracted completely into the rearshelf.

4. 5.

Convertible TopInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

LOCKING LEVER ROOF SWITCH

Operating the convertible topwhile any part of a passenger isin the way of the convertible topcan cause serious injury.

Make sure that you, yourpassenger, or any other peoplearound the vehicle are clear ofthe moving convertible top.

Do not sit on the f olded convertible top,or place any items on top of it. Youcould damage the top or the rearwindow.

07/07/25 17:37:24 31S2A680 0078 

2008 S2000

Page 77: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Use the convertible top cover whenthe top is folded to help preventforeign objects, dirt, etc., fromgetting into the material and themechanism.

The cover is attached to the bodywith four snaps: two behind the rollbars, and one on the side of eachseat. To install or remove theconvertible top cover , dothis:

Remove the convertible top coverfrom the trunk, and lay it intoposition behind the roll bar.

Hold the cover in place with itssnap on the driver’s side of the rollbar aligned with the pin on the rollbar. Press on both sides of thesnap to attach it to the pin. Do notpush or pull the snap button wheninstalling the snap.

Align the snap on the passenger’sside of the roll bar with the pin.Press on both sides of the snap toattach it to the pin.

1. 2.

3.

correctly

Convertible Top Cover

Convertible Top

74

PIN

SNAPS

SNAP

07/07/25 17:37:32 31S2A680 0079 

2008 S2000

Page 78: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Pull down the strap on thepassenger’s side of the cover, andalign its snap with the pin on thetrim panel behind the door. Presson both sides of the snap to attachit to the pin.

Pull down the strap on the driver’sside of the cover, and align itssnap with the pin on the trim panelbehind the door. Press on bothsides of the snap to attach it to thepin.

Fit the rear of the cover into thespace between the convertible topand its molding.

To remove the cover, reverse theprocedure.

The wind deflector keeps the windout while driving with theconvertible top folded or theremovable hardtop removed (seepage ). To use the deflector, liftit up forward.5.

6.4.

7.

78

On all models

Convertible Top

Wind Deflector

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

PIN

FASTENERSTRAP

SNAP

WIND DEFLECTOR

07/07/25 17:37:40 31S2A680 0080 

2008 S2000

Page 79: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Push the locking levers up whileholding the tab. When the latch isin place, release the tab. Makesure the convertible top is securelylatched.

Push in the tab to release thelocking levers, and pull them down.Note the movement of the latchwhen you push in the tab.

While holding the lever down,push in the tab to engage the latchin the windshield header. Pull thetop down and forward if necessary.

Apply the parking brake. Theconvertible top will not operateunless the parking brake is fullyengaged.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Push the ROOF switch forwardand hold it. The windows, if raised,will lower automatically.

The convertible top will rise.Release the ROOF switch whenthe top reaches the windshieldheader.

5.

6.

4.

1.

2.

3.

Convertible Top

Raising the Convertible Top

76

TAB LATCH

LOCKING LEVER

Operating the convertible topwhile any part of a passenger isin the way of the convertible topcan cause serious injury.

Make sure that you, yourpassenger, or any other peoplearound the vehicle are clear ofthe moving convertible top.

07/07/25 17:37:49 31S2A680 0081 

2008 S2000

Page 80: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Dust is the main cause of creaks orother sounds coming from theconvertible top.

Regularly clean the body seals withglass cleaner and a soft cloth. Do notuse a scraper or de-icing chemicalsto remove frost, snow, or ice fromthe top or the rear window.

Every 3 to 6 months, depending onhow often the top is folded, rub athin film of Shin-Etsu Silicon Grease(available from your dealer, P/N08798-9013) onto the seals whereverthey touch the convertible top oreach other.

Do not lean or sit on an open door.

Do not push or pull the door glassto open and close the door.

The convertible top seals aredesigned to promote the flow ofwater off the roof. Spraying high-pressure water directly on theseals can distort them, causing aleak. Use only a low-pressurewater stream when using a hose,and avoid commercial car washes.

Maintenance To reduce the possibility of leaks:

Convertible TopInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

Do not put any heavy items on thef olded convertible top. You coulddamage the material and themechanism.

07/07/25 17:37:56 31S2A680 0082 

2008 S2000

Page 81: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Because of the size and weight ofthe removable hardtop, it isrecommended that you havesomeone help you remove and installit.

Clean and dry the hardtop beforeremoving it. Store it in your garageor other protected area, and do notstack items on top of it.

CR models

Removable Hardtop

78

07/07/25 17:38:00 31S2A680 0083 

2008 S2000

Page 82: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Loosen the bolt of the rear coverlid with a flat-tipped screwdriver.

Pull the bolt out until it stopsagainst the lid.

Make sure the vehicle is parkedon level ground, and that you haveadequate clearance above thevehicle.

2. 3.

1.

CONTINUED

Removable Hardtop

Installation

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

LIDBOLT BOLT

07/07/25 17:38:08 31S2A680 0084 

2008 S2000

Page 83: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Hold the bolt and lid, and removethe lid by pulling them up togetheras shown in the illustration above.

Repeat the procedure for the lidon the other side.

Keep the lids in the trunk safely.

Move the seats forward.

Make sure the front locking leversare closed.

Make sure the handles for the sidelock pins are pivoted forward tothe first stop.However, do not pull the handle allthe way forward (touching theinside of the top).

4.

5.

6.

7.

8. 9.

Removable Hardtop

80

LOCKINGLEVER

LID

BOLT

07/07/25 17:38:16 31S2A680 0085 

2008 S2000

Page 84: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Carefully set the removablehardtop on the vehicle, makingsure the lock rods go into thepositioning holes behind each door.Be careful not to pinch yourfingers.

Push in the tab on each lockinglever and pull the locking leverdown.

Push the locking lever forwardand set the latch into thewindshield header.

Pull back on the locking lever andpush it up until it latches. Makesure it is securely latched.

Pivot the lock rods backward tolock down the sides of the hardtop.Make sure the rear windowdefogger wire is set under the lockrod to ensure the wire is notcrushed or entangled.

10. 11.

12.

13.

14.

CONTINUED

Removable HardtopInstrum

entsand

Controls

81

POSITIONING HOLE LOCKING LEVER

TAB LATCH LOCK ROD REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER WIRE

Make sure that the lock rods do notdamage any part of the vehicle, such asthe rear wing spoiler, when you installor remove the hardtop.

07/07/25 17:38:25 31S2A680 0086 

2008 S2000

Page 85: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Plug the harness for the rearwindow defogger (see page )into the rear connector. Make sureit locks into the connector.

Remove the cap from the rearwindow defogger connector.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

15. 16.61

Removable Hardtop

82

CAP CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

HARNESS

07/07/25 17:38:31 31S2A680 0087 

2008 S2000

Page 86: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Lower the windows.

Unplug the rear window defoggerharness from the connector bysqueezing the tab on the harnessplug. Pull on the plug, not theharness.

Push in the tab on each lockinglever and pull the locking leverdown.

Push the locking levers forwardand remove the latches from thewindshield header.

With the latches released, pullback on the locking levers andpush them up until they latch.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Removable Hardtop

Removal

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

TAB

TAB LATCH

LOCKING LEVER LOCKING LEVER

07/07/25 17:38:40 31S2A680 0088 

2008 S2000

Page 87: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Pivot the lock rods forward torelease the sides of the hardtop.

Lift the hardtop straight up off thevehicle and set it aside.

Install the cap on the reardefogger connector.

Take the rear cover lids out fromthe trunk.

6. 7.

8.

9.

Removable Hardtop

84

LOCK ROD

Make sure that the lock rods do notdamage any part of the vehicle, such asthe rear wing spoiler, when you installor remove the hardtop.

07/07/25 17:38:47 31S2A680 0089 

2008 S2000

Page 88: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

When reinstalling the rear coverlid, align the tabs to theappropriate holders and push thelid down while holding the bolt out.

Tighten the bolts securely withthe flat-tipped screwdriver.

Repeat the procedure for the lidon the other side.

Lift the wind deflector up (seepage ).

10. 11.

12.

13.75

Removable HardtopInstrum

entsand

Controls

85

LID

HOLDERS

BOLT

BOLT

TABS LID

07/07/25 17:38:54 31S2A680 0090 

2008 S2000

Page 89: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Support the hardtop during storageto prevent the front seal fromcontacting the floor or any othersurface that can deform the rubber.

Avoid automatic car washes that usea high pressure spray.

Removable Hardtop

Storing Washing

86

FRONT SEAL

07/07/25 17:38:59 31S2A680 0091 

2008 S2000

Page 90: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

TAB SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

07/07/25 17:39:07 31S2A680 0092 

2008 S2000

Page 91: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).46

Parking Brake

88

BUTTON

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

07/07/25 17:39:12 31S2A680 0093 

2008 S2000

Page 92: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

89

BEVERAGE HOLDER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

DASHBOARD LOWER POCKETDRIVER’S SEAT-BACK POCKET

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET VANITY MIRROR/SUNVISOR

: If equipped

AUDIO PANEL

07/07/25 17:39:16 31S2A680 0094 

2008 S2000

Page 93: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Open the beverage holder bypushing on the tab. The lid will slideopen.

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). It will not power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

To hold two cups in the beverageholder, flip the partition up.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassenger. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Beverage Holder Accessory Power Socket

Interior Convenience Items

90

PARTITION

07/07/25 17:39:24 31S2A680 0095 

2008 S2000

Page 94: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The lever to open the uppercompartment is inside the lowercompartment. Push up the lever, andlift the lid. To close, lower the lid,and push it down until it latches.

The area between the seats has twocompartments. Open the lowercompartment by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.You can lock or unlock the lowercompartment with the master key.

To open the audio panel, push on thetop center, and let the panel swingdown. To close, pivot the panel up,and push on it until it latches.

If equipped

Interior Convenience Items

Audio PanelConsole Compartments

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

LOWER COMPARTMENT

UPPER COMPARTMENT

07/07/25 17:39:32 31S2A680 0096 

2008 S2000

Page 95: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If the switch is in the center position,the interior light will come on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

The interior light has a three-position switch; ON, Door Activated,and OFF. In the Door Activated(center) position, the light comes onwhen you:

Open either door.Unlock the doors with the key orthe remote transmitter.

The dashboard lower pocket islocated next to the audio panel.

Dashboard Lower Pocket Interior Light

Interior Convenience Items, Interior Light

92

DOORACTIVATED

SWITCH

07/07/25 17:39:39 31S2A680 0097 

2008 S2000

Page 96: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

When the switch is in the centerposition with both doors closed, thetwo bulbs in the interior light caneach be turned on and off with thebutton next to it.

Interior LightInstrum

entsand

Controls

93

07/07/25 17:39:43 31S2A680 0098 

2008 S2000

Page 97: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

94

07/07/25 17:39:45 31S2A680 0099 

2008 S2000

Page 98: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them. (If you have an optionalaudio system, refer to the operatinginstructions that came with it.)

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

...............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 96........................Vents and Heating . 100

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 104............AM/FM Radio Reception . 107

.Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 109..................................Playing a CD . 114...................................CD Changer . 116

....................Protecting Your CDs . 117.........CD Player Error Messages . 120

.....CD Changer Error Messages . 121................Remote Audio Controls . 122.................Radio Theft Protection . 123

...............................Cruise Control . 124

FeaturesF

eatures

95

07/07/25 17:39:50 31S2A680 0100 

2008 S2000

Page 99: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Vents, Heating, and A/C

96

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

FAN CONTROL LEVER

MODE CONTROL DIAL

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTONExcept S2000 CR model

07/07/25 17:39:53 31S2A680 0101 

2008 S2000

Page 100: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Push this lever up and down toincrease or decrease the fan speedand airflow. The indicators next tothe lever show you the speed andairflow selected.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button comes onwhen the A/C is on.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent through the system again(recirculation mode). When theindicator is off, air is brought in fromthe outside of the vehicle (fresh air

mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Do not push the defogger buttonwhen the convertible top is folded.

Use the mode control dial to selectthe vents the air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardvents in all modes.

Air flows from the vents onboth sides of the instrument panel,and from the dashboard vent in frontof the passenger.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centervents in the dashboard above theaudio system, the vents on bothsides of the instrument panel, andfrom the floor vents. Select thisposition when you drive with theconvertible top folded.

61

CONTINUED

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Fan Control Lever

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Temperature Control Dial

Airflow Controls

Recirculation ButtonRear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control Dial

Features

97

07/07/25 17:40:09 31S2A680 0102 

2008 S2000

Page 101: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents behind the seat-backs.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Set the fan to the desired speed.Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.

Air flows from the floorvents and the vents on both sides ofthe instrument panel.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield,and the vents on both sides of theinstrument panel.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshieldand the vents on both sides of theinstrument panel.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

1.

2.3.4.

1.2.3.

1.2.

3.

4.5.

55

If the interior is very warm,

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Using the A/CVentilation

Using the Heater

98

07/07/25 17:40:23 31S2A680 0103 

2008 S2000

Page 102: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh air

mode and turns on the A/C.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

When you select or ,the system automatically turns onthe A/C. This helps to dehumidifythe air and to defog the windshield.In either mode, you cannot turn offthe A/C.

When you switch to another modefrom or , the A/Cstays on. Press the A/C button toturn it off.

Push the fan control level down untilthe indicator goes off. A lack ofairflow can cause the windows to fogup. You should keep the fan on at alltimes so stale air and moisture donot build up in the interior and causefogging.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner ventsand the vents on both sides of theinstrument panel by rotating thewheel below the vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents. Once the windshieldis clear, select fresh air mode toavoid fogging the windows.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to the maximum level.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.3.

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Dehumidify the Interior

To Defog and Defrost To Turn Everything Off

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Features

99

07/07/25 17:40:37 31S2A680 0104 

2008 S2000

Page 103: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Vents and Heating

100

FAN CONTROL LEVER

MODE CONTROL DIAL

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTONS2000 CR models

07/07/25 17:40:41 31S2A680 0105 

2008 S2000

Page 104: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Push this lever up and down toincrease or decrease the fan speedand airflow. The indicators next tothe lever show you the speed andairflow selected.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent through the system again(recirculation mode). When theindicator is off, air is brought in fromthe outside of the vehicle (fresh airmode).

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The outside air intakes for theheating system are at the base of thewindshield. Keep this area clear ofleaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, can cause the windows to fogup.

Do not push the defogger buttonwhen the removable hardtop isremoved.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the vents onboth sides of the instrument panel,and from the dashboard vent in frontof the passenger.

Use the mode control dial to selectthe vents the air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardvents in all modes.

61

CONTINUED

Fan Control Lever

Temperature Control Dial

Rear Window Defogger ButtonRecirculation ButtonAirflow Controls

Mode Control Dial

Vents and HeatingF

eatures

101

07/07/25 17:40:54 31S2A680 0106 

2008 S2000

Page 105: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents behind the seat-backs.

Air flows from the centervents in the dashboard, the vents onboth sides of the instrument panel,and from the floor vents. Select thisposition when you drive with theremovable hardtop removed.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Air flows from the floorvents and the vents on both sides ofthe instrument panel.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield,and the vents on both sides of theinstrument panel.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshieldand the vents on both sides of theinstrument panel.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

When you select or ,the system automatically turns onthe fresh air mode. This helps todefog the windshield.

1.2.3.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Ventilation

Using the Heater

To Defog and Defrost

Vents and Heating

102

07/07/25 17:41:08 31S2A680 0107 

2008 S2000

Page 106: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Push the fan control level down untilthe indicator goes off. A lack ofairflow can cause the windows to fogup. You should keep the fan on at alltimes so stale air and moisture donot build up in the interior and causefogging.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to the maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner ventsand the vents on both sides of theinstrument panel by rotating thewheel below the vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents. Once the windshieldis clear, select fresh air mode toavoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

3.

1.

2.

To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Vents and HeatingF

eatures

103

07/07/25 17:41:14 31S2A680 0108 

2008 S2000

Page 107: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Playing the AM/FM Radio

104

SCAN BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

AUTO SELECT INDICATOR

STEREO INDICATOR

SCAN INDICATOR

PRESET BUTTONS

SEEK BAR

Canadian model

TUNE KNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

AUTO SELECT INDICATOR

STEREO INDICATOR

SCAN INDICATOR

PRESET BUTTONS

SEEK BAR

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

AUTO SELECT BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTONPWR/VOL KNOB

PWR/VOL KNOB

U.S. models with Audio System

07/07/25 17:41:20 31S2A680 0109 

2008 S2000

Page 108: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

--

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to a

lower frequency.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of thebar, then release it.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 5 seconds. When it plays astation you want to listen to, pressthe SCAN button again.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the PWR/VOL knob or theAM/FM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction inAM is not available.

Each preset button(1 6) can store one station on AM,and two stations on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwelve stations.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

The preset frequencies may be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

To Play the Radio

To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

PRESET

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

105

07/07/25 17:41:30 31S2A680 0110 

2008 S2000

Page 109: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

Turn the knob to adjust the setting.When the level reaches the center,you will see a ‘‘C’’ in the display. Thesystem will return to the audiodisplay in about 5 seconds.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

Press the SOUND/MODE (TUNE)knob repeatedly to display the bass(BAS), treble (TRE), fader (FAD),and balance (BAL) setting.

Adjusts the bass in thesound.

Adjusts the treble in thesound.

Adjusts the fader, or thefront-to-back strength of the sound.

Adjusts the balance, or side-to-side strength of the sound.

60

To turn off auto selectAUTO SELECT

Audio System LightingAdjusting the Sound

BAS

TRE

FAD

BAL

Playing the AM/FM Radio

106

07/07/25 17:41:41 31S2A680 0111 

2008 S2000

Page 110: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

107

07/07/25 17:41:49 31S2A680 0112 

2008 S2000

Page 111: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception

108

07/07/25 17:41:55 31S2A680 0113 

2008 S2000

Page 112: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.

Optional on U.S. modelsNot available on Canadian models

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Optional on U.S. Models)F

eatures

109

AM/FM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONSPOWER/VOLUMEKNOB

CATEGORY BAR DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

MORE BUTTON

07/07/25 17:42:01 31S2A680 0114 

2008 S2000

Page 113: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

You may experience periods whenXM radio does not transmit the artistname and or the song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.This information is not availableunder certain situations.

If you press and hold the DISP/MODE button for 5 seconds, it willchange between category mode andchannel mode. The display will showCH for the channel mode orCATEGORY for the category mode.

In the channel mode, you can receiveall of the available channels in all ofthe different categories. In categorymode, you will receive only thestations within the selected category.

Expands the display toshow the 6 remaining letters beyondthe first 10 letters in an artist’s nameor song title. The system is set up soonly 16 letters can be displayed for

any title or name. Press MORE toview the next 6 letters. The systemwill return to the original displayafter 8 seconds.

Turn the TUNE knob leftto go down the channels or right togo up. In the channel mode, theTUNE knob will tune up or downthrough all the channels availablefrom the XM radio. In the categorymode, the TUNE knob will cyclethrough only the channels within thecategory you have currently selected.

Usethe CATEGORY bar to select adesired category, such as jazz, rock,classical, etc. In both category modeand channel mode, pressing thecategory bar will change thecategory up or down.

Each time theDISP button is pressed and released,the display information changes inthe following sequence: channelname, channel number, category,artist name, and music title.

To listen to satellite radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position. Push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the CD/AUXbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe PWR/VOL knob. The lastchannel you listened to will show inthe display.

Playing the Satellite Radio

MORE

TUNE

CATEGORY (SEEK/SKIP)

DISPLAY/MODE

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Optional on U.S. Models)

110

07/07/25 17:42:09 31S2A680 0115 

2008 S2000

Page 114: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

--

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

To store a channel:You can store up to 12

preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

The presets may be lost if yourvehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Repeat steps 2 through 3 to storethe first six channels.

Use the TUNE knob, theCATEGORY bar, or the SCANbuttons to tune to a desiredchannel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Press the CD/AUX button. EitherXM1 or XM2 will show in thedisplay.

Press the CD/AUX button again.The available XM band will show.Store the next six channels usingsteps 2 through 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

SCANPreset

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Optional on U.S. Models)F

eatures

111

07/07/25 17:42:18 31S2A680 0116 

2008 S2000

Page 115: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Optional on U.S. Models)

112

Signal may beblocked bymountains orlarge obstacles tothe south.

SATELLITE

Signal is weaker inthese areas.

GROUND REPEATER

07/07/25 17:42:23 31S2A680 0117 

2008 S2000

Page 116: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.

Driving in tunnels.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

There may also be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at

1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNEknob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,and you’ll be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom the activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

If your XM Radio service has expired,or you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the CD/AUXbutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Optional on U.S. Models)

Receiving Satellite Radio Service

Features

113

07/07/25 17:42:32 31S2A680 0118 

2008 S2000

Page 117: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Playing a CD

114

Canadian model

CD SLOT CD BUTTON CD SLOT EJECT BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

CD BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

U.S. model with Audio System

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

REPEAT BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

07/07/25 17:42:38 31S2A680 0119 

2008 S2000

Page 118: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON(II) position.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the skip bar,the player skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side of the barto skip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the CD will begin playing where itleft off.

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the CD player, press the CDbutton. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.

Insert a CD about halfway into theCD slot. The drive will pull the CD inthe rest of the way and begin to playit. When the system reaches the endof the disc, it will return to thebeginning and play the disc again.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold or .

To move rapidly within atrack, press and hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press and hold tomove forward. Press and hold

to move backward. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

CONTINUED

To Play a CDSKIPTo Change or Select Tracks

SEEK

Playing a CDF

eatures

115

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

07/07/25 17:42:48 31S2A680 0120 

2008 S2000

Page 119: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

- +

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press it again to turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks in random order. To activaterandom play, press and release theRDM button. You will see RDM inthe display. Press it again to returnto normal play.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.Press the AM/FM button to switchto the radio while a CD is playing.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the CD will begin playing where itleft off.

An optional six disc CD changer isavailable for your vehicle. This CDchanger uses the same controls usedfor the in-dash CD player.

Load the desired CDs into themagazine, and load the magazineinto the changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The CD and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different CD, use the preset 5(DISC ) or preset 6 (DISC )button. If you select an empty slot inthe magazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot.

REPEAT

RANDOM

To Stop Playing a CD

Operating the Optional CDChanger

Playing a CD, CD Changer

116

07/07/25 17:42:56 31S2A680 0121 

2008 S2000

Page 120: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly or possibly jam in the drive.

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the system.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

Protecting Your CDs

Protecting CDsGeneral Information

Features

117

07/07/25 17:43:06 31S2A680 0122 

2008 S2000

Page 121: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The CD player/changer has asophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damagedCD as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these CDs are shown tothe right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick CDs

Damaged CDs Poor quality CDs

1.

2. 3.

Additional Information ofRecommended CDs

Protecting Your CDs

118

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

With Label/Sticker

With PlasticRing

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Bubbled/Wrinkled

07/07/25 17:43:16 31S2A680 0123 

2008 S2000

Page 122: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Small, irregular shaped CDs CDs with scratches, dirty CDs

Scratches and fingerprints on theCDs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended CDs are printedwith the following logo.

4. 5.

Protecting Your CDsF

eatures

119

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

07/07/25 17:43:24 31S2A680 0124 

2008 S2000

Page 123: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

**

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

For the additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

CauseErrorMessage

Solution

118

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High temperature

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the CD.Check if the CD is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 118.Press the EJECT button, and pull out the CD.Check the CD for damage or deformation.For more information, see page 118.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errormessage does not disappear after the CD isejected, see your dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

1 : U.S. model2 : Canadian model

2

1

1

2

2

1

CD Player Error Messages

120

07/07/25 17:43:35 31S2A680 0125 

2008 S2000

Page 124: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

**

Cause SolutionThe chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

For the additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

ErrorMessage

118

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine

Mechanical Error

High temperature

No CD magazine in theCD changer

Press the magazine eject button, pull out themagazine, and check for an error message.Insert the magazine again. If the error messagedoes not disappear or the magazine cannot bepulled out, see your dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button, and pull it out.Check for an error message, and insert themagazine again. If the error message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

1 : U.S. model2 : Canadian model

2

2

1

2

1

1

1

2

CD Changer Error MessagesF

eatures

121

07/07/25 17:43:47 31S2A680 0126 

2008 S2000

Page 125: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

+-

If you want to mute the soundtemporarily, push the MUTE button.The indicator in the button will comeon to indicate the mute function is on.Press the button again to cancelmute.

Use the VOLUME bar to adjust thevolume. Push to increase thevolume and to decrease it. Holdthe lever until the volume reachesthe desired level, then release it.

Four controls for the audio systemare on the left side of the dashboardby the instrument panel. These letyou control basic functions withoutdistracting your attention fromdriving.

The AUDIO CONTROL buttonchanges the mode. Pressing thebutton repeatedly selects FM1, FM2,AM, CD (if a CD is loaded), CDchanger (if you have the optional CDchanger).

The CHANNEL button has twofunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing aCD.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CHANNEL button to changestations. Each time you press thisbutton, the system advances to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. You will see thenumber of the selected preset button

in the audio system display.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push theCHANNEL button.

These controls work only with thefactory-installed audio system. Theywill not function if you install anynon-Honda system.

If equipped

Remote Audio Controls

122

AUDIO CONTROLBUTTON

CHANNELBUTTON

MUTEBUTTON

VOLUMEBAR

07/07/25 17:43:55 31S2A680 0127 

2008 S2000

Page 126: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

You may have to store your favoritestations in the preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings may be lost whenthe power is disconnected.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ (U.S.model) or ‘‘Code’’ (Canadian model)in the frequency display the nexttime you turn on the system. Use thepreset buttons to enter the five-digitcode. The code is on the radio codecard included in your owner’smanual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

If equipped

Radio Theft ProtectionF

eatures

123

07/07/25 17:44:02 31S2A680 0128 

2008 S2000

Page 127: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. Theindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the CRUISE button. Theindicator over the button comes on.

1.

2.

3.

Cruise Control

Using the Cruise Control

124

CANCEL BUTTON

SET/decel

RESUME/accel

CRUISE BUTTONImproper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

07/07/25 17:44:09 31S2A680 0129 

2008 S2000

Page 128: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, and press the SET/decelbutton.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel goes out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/decel button.

Cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going upand down hills. If your speedincreases going down a hill, usethe brakes to slow down. This willcancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. Theindicator on the instrument panelwill come back on.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle speeds up about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise ControlF

eatures

125

07/07/25 17:44:17 31S2A680 0130 

2008 S2000

Page 129: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), then press and releasethe RESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

126

07/07/25 17:44:26 31S2A680 0131 

2008 S2000

Page 130: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 128.................Fuel Recommendation . 128

.........Service Station Procedures . 129....................................Refueling . 129

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 130

...................................Oil Check . 131.............Engine Coolant Check . 132

...............................Fuel Economy . 133...Accessories and Modifications . 136

.............................Carrying Cargo . 138

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

127

07/07/25 17:44:29 31S2A680 0132 

2008 S2000

Page 131: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

We recommend quality gasolinecontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,

and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance. Useof a gasoline with a pump octanenumber less than 87 can lead toengine damage.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration. Do not exceed 5,500rpm for the first 600 miles (1,000km) of operation.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

128

07/07/25 17:44:39 31S2A680 0133 

2008 S2000

Page 132: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the knob on the driver’s doorjamb.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Refueling

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

129

Pull

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

07/07/25 17:44:48 31S2A680 0134 

2008 S2000

Page 133: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle to the left torelease the hood. Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

1. 2.

5.

6.

219

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood

130

RELEASE HANDLE

07/07/25 17:44:55 31S2A680 0135 

2008 S2000

Page 134: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (blackhandle).

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

170

Service Station Procedures

Adding Engine Oil

Oil Check

Before

Driving

131

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

CLIPSUPPORT ROD

GRIP

07/07/25 17:45:06 31S2A680 0136 

2008 S2000

Page 135: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

173

167Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Service Station Procedures

132

RESERVE TANK

MAX MIN

07/07/25 17:45:11 31S2A680 0137 

2008 S2000

Page 136: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

--

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

Fuel EconomyB

eforeD

riving

133

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

07/07/25 17:45:20 31S2A680 0138 

2008 S2000

Page 137: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

An under-inflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

167

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

170

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Fuel Economy

134

07/07/25 17:45:33 31S2A680 0139 

2008 S2000

Page 138: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

1)2)3)4)

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

Fuel EconomyB

eforeD

riving

135

Miles drivenGallons of

fuelMiles per

Gallon

100 Kilometers L per 100 kmLiter

07/07/25 17:45:42 31S2A680 0140 

2008 S2000

Page 139: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer. If possible,have your dealer inspect the finalinstallation.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

222Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

136

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

07/07/25 17:45:49 31S2A680 0141 

2008 S2000

Page 140: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety systems could make thesystems ineffective.

Here are some examples:

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

137

07/07/25 17:45:57 31S2A680 0142 

2008 S2000

Page 141: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Upper and lower consolecompartments

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, whichmay make it unsafe. Before carryingany type of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Trunk

Seat-back pocket

Console side net

Door pockets

Dashboard lower pocket

Carrying Cargo

138

UPPER AND LOWER CONSOLECOMPARTMENTS

DOOR POCKETS

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET CONSOLE SIDE NET DASHBOARD LOWERPOCKET

07/07/25 17:46:05 31S2A680 0143 

2008 S2000

Page 142: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

- ×

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 400 lbs (181 kg) for U.S. vehicles,and 185 kg for Canadian vehicles.This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

139

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

07/07/25 17:46:16 31S2A680 0144 

2008 S2000

Page 143: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Carrying Cargo

140

Max Load (400 lbs)

Max Load (400 lbs)

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 1 = 150 lbs)

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)

Cargo Weight(250 lbs)

Cargo Weight(100 lbs)

07/07/25 17:46:22 31S2A680 0145 

2008 S2000

Page 144: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk

Before

Driving

141

07/07/25 17:46:27 31S2A680 0146 

2008 S2000

Page 145: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

142

07/07/25 17:46:29 31S2A680 0147 

2008 S2000

Page 146: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual transmission. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour vehicle and the braking system.

........................Driving Guidelines . 144

........................Preparing to Drive . 145.......................Starting the Engine . 146

...................Manual Transmission . 147...........................................Parking . 149

.............................Braking System . 149...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 150

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 152

Tire Pressure Monitoring System......................................(TPMS) . 154

...........................Towing a Trailer . 157

DrivingD

riving

143

07/07/25 17:46:33 31S2A680 0148 

2008 S2000

Page 147: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Use caution if you ever drive yourvehicle on very rough or ruttedroads. You could damage thesuspension and underbody bybottoming out. Going too fast overparking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ canalso cause damage.

Because of the low-profile tiresfitted to your vehicle, the alloywheels are closer to the ground.Driving over a pothole or roaddebris at too high a speed canseriously damage a wheel. Slowdown under these conditions.

Your vehicle is designed to give youoptimum handling and performanceon well-maintained roads. As part ofthis design, your vehicle has aminimum of ground clearance andvery low-profile tires.

Curbs and steep inclines coulddamage the front and rearbumpers. Low curbs that do notaffect the average vehicle may behigh enough to hit the bumper onyour vehicle. The front or rearbumper may scrape when trying todrive onto an incline, such as asteep driveway or trailer ramps.

Driving Guidelines

144

07/07/25 17:46:38 31S2A680 0149 

2008 S2000

Page 148: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passenger has fastened his orher seat belt (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

1.

2.

12

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

4569

87

Preparing to DriveD

riving

145

07/07/25 17:46:47 31S2A680 0150 

2008 S2000

Page 149: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. The ENGINE START buttonhas no effect unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

Turn the ignition key to the ON(II) position.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, push the ENGINE STARTbutton. Do not hold the ENGINESTART button for more than 15seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pausefor at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 6.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 5 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Starting the Engine

146

ENGINE START BUTTON

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .63

07/07/25 17:46:56 31S2A680 0151 

2008 S2000

Page 150: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse instead of sixth (see page

). When shifting up or down,make sure you push the clutch pedaldown all the way, shift to the nextgear, and let the pedal up gradually.When you are not shifting, do notrest your foot on the clutch pedal.This can cause your clutch to wearout faster.

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

Your vehicle is equipped with analuminum shift lever. If you leave thevehicle parked outside for a longtime on a hot day, be careful beforemoving the shift lever. Because ofthe heat, the shift lever may beextremely hot. If the outsidetemperature is low, the shift leverfeels cold.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

148

Manual TransmissionD

riving

147

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

07/07/25 17:47:02 31S2A680 0152 

2008 S2000

Page 151: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

With the clutch pedal pressed, movethe shift lever to the reverse side ofthe neutral gate. Then push the shiftlever down, and shift to reverse.

Shift Up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal Acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)47 mph (75 km/h)52 mph (83 km/h)

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

The manual transmission has alockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from fifth to reverse instead ofsixth while the vehicle is moving.

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

148

07/07/25 17:47:10 31S2A680 0153 

2008 S2000

Page 152: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectivenessand reduces brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Make sure the convertible top andthe windows are closed.

Make sure the removable hardtopis properly installed and thewindows are closed.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb, and put the transmission inreverse gear.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb, and put the transmission infirst gear.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammable

materials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Lock the doors.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

CONTINUED

Except CR models

CR models

Parking

Parking Tips

Braking System

Parking, Braking SystemD

riving

149

07/07/25 17:47:22 31S2A680 0154 

2008 S2000

Page 153: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andmay hear some noise. This is normal:it is the ABS rapidly pumping thebrakes. On dry pavement, you willneed to press on the brake pedalvery hard before the ABS activates.However, you may feel the ABSactivate immediately if you are tryingto stop on snow or ice.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You should never pump the brake pedal.Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

150

07/07/25 17:47:30 31S2A680 0155 

2008 S2000

Page 154: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

ABS IndicatorABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle;

Important Safety Reminders

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

151

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

07/07/25 17:47:37 31S2A680 0156 

2008 S2000

Page 155: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes. If this indicator comes on while

driving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible (see page ).

Without VSA, your vehicle still hasnormal braking and cornering ability,but it does not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

50

50

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

152

07/07/25 17:47:45 31S2A680 0157 

2008 S2000

Page 156: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

This switch is at the left side of theright vent. Press it to turn VSA onand off.

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

To turn VSA off, press and hold theswitch until the VSA activationindicator comes on.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

190

200

Except CR models

VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) SystemD

riving

153

VSA OFF SWITCH

07/07/25 17:47:55 31S2A680 0158 

2008 S2000

Page 157: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, repair the tire with the tirerepair kit (see page ).

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low while driving, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

200

206

CR models

Except CR models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

154

07/07/25 17:48:03 31S2A680 0159 

2008 S2000

Page 158: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tire

information label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

189

190

200

Except CR models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Driving

155

07/07/25 17:48:13 31S2A680 0160 

2008 S2000

Page 159: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

CR modelsIf you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Repair the flat tire with the tirerepair kit (see page ).

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer ora qualified technician.

After you repair the flat tire, the lowtire pressure indicator may come on.This is normal; the system is notmonitoring the repaired tire pressure.

Have the flat tire repaired by thedealer as soon as possible.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

206

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Repairing a Tire with TPMS

156

07/07/26 09:33:17 31S2A680 0161 

2008 S2000

Page 160: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer. Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

Towing a TrailerD

riving

157

07/07/25 17:48:25 31S2A680 0162 

2008 S2000

Page 161: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

158

07/07/25 17:48:27 31S2A680 0163 

2008 S2000

Page 162: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 160....................Maintenance Minder . 161

..............................Fluid Locations . 169........................Adding Engine Oil . 170

.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 171..............................Engine Coolant . 173

....................Windshield Washers . 175........Manual Transmission Fluid . 176

..........................Differential Fluid . 177................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 178

.............................................Lights . 179................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 184

.....................................Floor Mats . 185..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 185

..............................Audio Antenna . 185.................................Wiper Blades . 186

...........................................Wheels . 188...............................................Tires . 188

...................Checking the Battery . 196.............................Vehicle Storage . 198

251

MaintenanceM

aintenance

159

07/07/25 17:48:32 31S2A680 0164 

2008 S2000

Page 163: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here.However, we cannot warn you ofevery conceivable hazard that canarise in performing maintenance.Only you can decide whether ornot you should perform a giventask.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate theengine.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

Carbon Monoxide poisonfrom engine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

160

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

07/07/25 17:48:42 31S2A680 0165 

2008 S2000

Page 164: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

------------

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and push and releasethe TRIP button repeatedly until theengine oil life display appears (seepage ).

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealer doengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

53

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance

161

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

TRIP BUTTON

07/07/25 17:48:50 31S2A680 0166 

2008 S2000

Page 165: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicator reminds you that the timeis coming soon to take your vehiclein for the required maintenance.

168

Maintenance Minder

162

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

07/07/25 17:48:56 31S2A680 0167 

2008 S2000

Page 166: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

Negative mileage means yourvehicle has passed the maintenancerequired point.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative mileage isdisplayed and begins to blink afterthe vehicle has been driven 10 miles(10 km) or more.

Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ messagealong with the same maintenanceitem code(s), every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator ( ) also comes on andremains on in the instrument panel.

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

163

07/07/25 17:49:04 31S2A680 0168 

2008 S2000

Page 167: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

-The maximum total mileage shownis ‘‘ 9999.’’

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

Immediately have the service done,and make sure to reset the display asdescribed on the next page.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperatureevery time you press and release theTRIP button.

168

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Maintenance Minder

164

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM (S)

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

07/07/25 17:49:11 31S2A680 0169 

2008 S2000

Page 168: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the TRIP button until theengine oil life indicator isdisplayed.

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

Press the TRIP button for about10 seconds. The engine oil lifeindicator and the maintenanceitem code(s) will blink.

Press the TRIP button for about 5seconds. The maintenance itemscode(s) will disappear, and theengine oil life will reset to ‘‘100.’’

3.

1.

2.

4.

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeIndicator

Maintenance

165

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

07/07/25 17:49:19 31S2A680 0170 

2008 S2000

Page 169: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

166

07/07/25 17:49:25 31S2A680 0171 

2008 S2000

Page 170: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

U.S. Vehicles:You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display. Tires Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Brakes and clutch Check thefluid level monthly. See page .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

131

132

178

189

179

CONTINUED

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

167

07/07/25 17:49:35 31S2A680 0172 

2008 S2000

Page 171: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Maintenance Minder

168

Maintenance Sub Items

Check tire inflation and condition

Replace air cleaner element

Replace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission fluid

Replace spark plugs

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

Replace rear differential fluid

Maintenance Main Items

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Inspect front and rear brakes

Check parking brake adjustment

Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system

Fuel lines and connections

Check expiration date for tire sealant bottle

:

A

B

Symbol Symbol

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

NOTE:

1 :

2 : CR models

167

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Driving in mountainous areas results in higher levelof mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requiresdifferential fluid changes more frequently thanrecommended by the maintenance minder. If youregularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,have the differential fluid changed every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

Main

tenance

Min

der

07/07/25 17:49:42 31S2A680 0173 

2008 S2000

Page 172: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Fluid LocationsM

aintenance

169

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Black handle)

CLUTCH FLUID(Gray cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

07/07/25 17:49:46 31S2A680 0174 

2008 S2000

Page 173: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’Oil is major contributor to your

engine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APIcertification seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda motor oil in your vehicle foras long as you own it.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour inthe oil slowly and carefully so you donot spill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Reinstall the engineoil fill cap, and tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes, and recheck theoil level on the engine oil dipstick.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

170

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

07/07/25 17:49:53 31S2A680 0175 

2008 S2000

Page 174: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart.

An oil with a viscosity of 10W-30 ispreferred for optimum fuel economyand year-round protection in yourvehicle. You may use 5W-40 oil if thetemperature in your area goes below0°F ( 20°C).

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1.

CONTINUED

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and FilterM

aintenance

171

Ambient Temperature

07/07/25 17:50:03 31S2A680 0176 

2008 S2000

Page 175: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Install the engine oil fill cap. Startthe engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

2. 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Changing the Oil and Filter

172

WASHER OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

5.1 US qt (4.8 )

07/07/25 17:50:13 31S2A680 0177 

2008 S2000

Page 176: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-LifeAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 %antifreeze and 50 % water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

9.

10.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Changing the Oil and Filter, Engine CoolantM

aintenance

173

RESERVE TANK

MAX MIN

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

07/07/25 17:50:21 31S2A680 0178 

2008 S2000

Page 177: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

2.

3.

4.

5.1.

Engine Coolant

174

RADIATOR CAP

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

07/07/25 17:50:30 31S2A680 0179 

2008 S2000

Page 178: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Check the fluid level by looking atthe level gauge attached to the cap.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

Windshield WashersM

aintenance

175

LEVEL GAUGE

RESERVOIR CAP

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

07/07/25 17:50:36 31S2A680 0180 

2008 S2000

Page 179: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Installthe filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the intervals shown on theinformation display.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely.

Manual Transmission Fluid

176

CORRECT LEVEL

FILLER BOLT

07/07/25 17:50:43 31S2A680 0181 

2008 S2000

Page 180: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Use an SAE 90 viscosity hypoid gearoil, API service classified GL5 orGL6 only.

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt. Tightenit securely. Tightening torque:

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Check the fluid level with thedifferential at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thedifferential fluid filler bolt andwasher, and carefully feel inside thebolt hole with your finger. The fluidlevel should be up to the edge of thebolt hole. If it is not, slowly add fluiduntil it starts to run out of the hole.

The differential should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the intervals shown on theinformation display.

Differential FluidM

aintenance

177

CORRECT LEVEL

FILLER BOLT

WASHER

34 lbf·ft (46 N·m , 4.7 kgf·m)

07/07/25 17:50:49 31S2A680 0182 

2008 S2000

Page 181: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance schedule.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

Brake Fluid Clutch Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid

178

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

07/07/25 17:51:00 31S2A680 0183 

2008 S2000

Page 182: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

Halogen bulbs are used for the highbeam headlight bulbs. Whenreplacing a high beam headlight bulb,handle it by its base, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be done by yourdealer or other qualified mechanic.

CONTINUED

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

LightsM

aintenance

179

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

07/07/25 17:51:06 31S2A680 0184 

2008 S2000

Page 183: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Open the hood.If you need to change the highbeam headlight bulb on the driver’sside, remove the coolant reservetank from its holder by pulling itstraight up.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way, and remove the bulbsocket.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Make surethe bulb is installed correctly bylooking through the headlight lens.The pins on the base of the bulbshould fit in the holes in theheadlight assembly. Pivot the hold-down wire back in place, and clipthe end into the slot.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Turn on theheadlights to test the new bulb.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the coolant reserve tank.(Driver’s side)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

180

CONNECTOR BULB

07/07/25 17:51:16 31S2A680 0185 

2008 S2000

Page 184: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, then turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger’s side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the three holding clipsfrom the inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover back.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Install the new bulb in the socket.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the three holding clips.Lock each clip in place by pushingon the center.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Replacing Front Turn Signal andSide Marker/Parking Light Bulbs

LightsM

aintenance

181

07/07/25 17:51:26 31S2A680 0186 

2008 S2000

Page 185: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Use a small flat-tipped screwdriverto pry carefully on the back edgeof the side turn signal assemblyuntil it pops out of the body.

Turn the bulb holder one-quarterturn counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lens.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Put the bulb holder back into itshole in the lens, and turn itclockwise until it locks.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the side turn signal assemblyback into the body, front first.Push on the back edge until itsnaps into place.1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Replacing a Side Turn Signal Bulb

Lights

182

LENS

BULB SOCKET

07/07/25 17:51:34 31S2A680 0187 

2008 S2000

Page 186: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Open the trunk.

Remove the fasteners from thetrunk lining. To remove a fastener,push on the center of the headuntil it pops in, then pull thefastener out.

Pull the lining back.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned out bulb bypulling it straight out of its socket.

Determine which bulb is burnedout: turn signal or back-up light.

1.

2.

3.

4. 5.

6.

CONTINUED

Replacing Rear Bulbs

LightsM

aintenance

183

SOCKET BULB

07/07/25 17:51:44 31S2A680 0188 

2008 S2000

Page 187: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Push the socket into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Install the trunk lining, and secureit with the fasteners. To reinstall afastener, reset the fastener bypushing on the pointed end until itpops back almost flush with thefingers on the housing. Put thefastener in the hole of the trunklining, and push on the center untilit locks (the center is flush withthe head).

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts

184

07/07/25 17:51:51 31S2A680 0189 

2008 S2000

Page 188: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps them fromsliding forward and possiblyinterfering with vehicle operation.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchor. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mat.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling (if equipped) system.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe heating and cooling (if equipped)system becomes less than usual.

Floor Mats

Dust and Pollen Filter

Audio Antenna(If equipped)

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Audio AntennaM

aintenance

185

Your vehicle is equipped with anantenna at the right rear f ender.Bef ore using a ‘‘drive-through’’ carwash, remove the antenna byunscrewing it by hand. This preventsthe antenna f rom being damaged by thecar wash brushes.

07/07/25 17:52:00 31S2A680 0190 

2008 S2000

Page 189: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

To replace a wiper blade:1.

2. 3.

Wiper Blades

186

LOCK TAB BLADE

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the wiper arms.

07/07/25 17:52:07 31S2A680 0191 

2008 S2000

Page 190: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

187

REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

07/07/25 17:52:13 31S2A680 0192 

2008 S2000

Page 191: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Your vehicle is equipped with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a high-traction compoundand tread pattern to provide superioracceleration, cornering, and stoppingunder most driving conditions.

However, these tires are not suitablefor driving on snow or ice, so all-season or winter tires must beinstalled for winter drivingconditions.

See page for194

Wheels, Tires

Wheels Tires

Winter Driving.

188

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

07/07/25 17:52:20 31S2A680 0193 

2008 S2000

Page 192: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should use your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on page .

154

190

Inflation Guidelines

TiresM

aintenance

189

07/07/25 17:52:29 31S2A680 0194 

2008 S2000

Page 193: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

The following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.You should look for:

For convenience, the recommendedcold air pressures and tire sizes areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

The compact spare tire pressure is:

238

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Except CR models

CR models

Except CR models

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tire Inspection

Tires

190

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Front:

Rear:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

215/45R17 87W

245/40R17 91W

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

255/40R17 94W

07/07/26 09:33:36 31S2A680 0195 

2008 S2000

Page 194: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).238

Tire MaintenanceTire Service Life

TireLabeling

TiresM

aintenance

191

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

07/07/25 17:52:54 31S2A680 0196 

2008 S2000

Page 195: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

You should not rotate your vehicle’stires. The front and rear tires aredifferent sizes, so they cannot berotated front-to-rear. The original-equipment tires on your vehicle havea unidirectional tread pattern, sothey cannot be rotated side-to-side.

The tires that came on your vehiclewere designed and constructed toprovide superior grip duringacceleration, braking, and cornering.

As a trade-off, they will wear morerapidly than tires used on ordinarypassenger vehicles. Because of thevehicle’s weight distribution, and thefact that the rear wheels are thedriving wheels, you can expect themto wear more rapidly than the fronttires.

The mileage you can expect fromyour vehicle tires is the same ascomparable mid-and rear-enginesports cars, and it will vary greatlywith your driving habits.

If you drive moderately, the reartires could last more than 10,000miles (16,000 km). However, themileage will be substantially less ifyou tend to drive your vehicle at theupper limits of its capabilities.

You should carefully inspect yourvehicle’s tires for wear, damage, andproper inflation every 7,500 miles(12,000 km) or when tire inspectionis indicated on the informationdisplay (see page ).

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s side wall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theanti-lock brake and the vehiclestability assist systems to workinconsistently.

168

Tires

Tire Rotation

Tire Wear

Replacing Tires and Wheels

192

07/07/25 17:53:03 31S2A680 0197 

2008 S2000

Page 196: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system toactivate.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

236

238

Except CR models

CR models

Wheel and Tire Specifications

TiresM

aintenance

193

Front:17 x 7 J

Rear:17 x 8 1/2 J

Front:215/45R17 87W

Rear:

245/40R17 91W

255/40R17 94W

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

07/07/25 17:53:14 31S2A680 0198 

2008 S2000

Page 197: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

For more information on snow tires,consult your dealer.

Your vehicle’s tires are not suitablefor mounting any traction device.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on therear tires.

Your vehicle is equipped withsummer tires. Be aware that thesetires are not designed for winterdriving conditions.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Cable-type: Security Chain Company(SCC) Radial Chain SC1034

Cable-type: RUD 48493

Except CR models

U.S. S2000 model

Canadian model

CR models only

Winter Driving

Tires

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

194

07/07/25 17:53:24 31S2A680 0199 

2008 S2000

Page 198: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

TiresM

aintenance

195

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

07/07/25 17:53:27 31S2A680 0200 

2008 S2000

Page 199: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, theclock setting in the instrument panelwill be canceled. To reset the time,see page .

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio, youmay see ‘‘CODE’’ (U.S. model) or‘‘Code’’ (Canadian model) in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page

).

56

123

Checking the Battery

196

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

07/07/25 17:53:33 31S2A680 0201 

2008 S2000

Page 200: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the BatteryM

aintenance

197

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

07/07/25 17:53:37 31S2A680 0202 

2008 S2000

Page 201: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Raise the convertible top cover.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse.

Vehicle Storage

198

07/07/25 17:53:46 31S2A680 0203 

2008 S2000

Page 202: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 200....................Changing a Flat Tire . 201....................Repairing a Flat Tire . 206

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 212................................Jump Starting . 214

..............If the Engine Overheats . 215.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 218..........Charging System Indicator . 218

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 219...............Brake System Indicator . 220

.......Closing the Convertible Top . 221..............................................Fuses . 222

..........Checking and Replacing . 223..............................Fuse Locations . 226

......................Emergency Towing . 228..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 228

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

199

07/07/25 17:53:50 31S2A680 0204 

2008 S2000

Page 203: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not mount tire chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not mount the compact sparetire on either rear wheel position;it will damage the limited slipdifferential (see page ).

The low tire pressure indicatorcomes on and stays on after youreplace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire. After severalmiles (kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the lowtire pressure indicator goes off.

201

Except CR models

Compact Spare Tire

200

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

07/07/25 17:53:59 31S2A680 0205 

2008 S2000

Page 204: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Open the trunk. Lift up the toolbox lid, and take the jack, thewheel nut wrench, and theextension out of the tool box.

The compact spare tire is smallerthan a standard tire, which will affectthe vehicle’s handling. Drivecautiously when this spare ismounted on your vehicle.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have yourpassenger get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in reverse. Apply theparking brake.

The size difference may also causedamage to the rear differential, so donot mount the compact spare on therear. If either rear tire goes flat,remove the front tire on that sameside, mount the compact spare tireon the front, then mount the fronttire on the rear.

Your vehicle is equipped with thetire repair kit instead of the sparetire. This kit is available for easyrepair of a flat tire (see page ). 3.

1.

2.

206

CONTINUED

Except CR models

CR models

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

201

TOOL BOX LID

JACK

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Use the jack that came with yourvehicle. If you try to raise anothervehicle with this jack or use anotherjack to raise your vehicle, the vehicle orjack can be damaged.

07/07/25 17:54:09 31S2A680 0206 

2008 S2000

Page 205: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Unscrew the wing bolt, and takethe spare tire out of the spare tireshelf.

Remove the three clips holdingthe spare tire cover by pulling therings straight back. Remove thespare tire cover.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the center of the jackingpoint tab is resting in the jacknotch.

4. 5.

6.

7.

Changing a Flat Tire

202

SPARE TIRE COVER

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

JACKINGPOINT

CLIPS

07/07/25 17:54:16 31S2A680 0207 

2008 S2000

Page 206: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

8. 9. 10.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

203

BRAKE HUBEXTENSION

07/07/25 17:54:23 31S2A680 0208 

2008 S2000

Page 207: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely ina crisscross pattern. Have thewheel nut torque checked at thenearest automotive service facility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

11. 12. 13.

Changing a Flat Tire

204

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

07/07/25 17:54:29 31S2A680 0209 

2008 S2000

Page 208: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Put the flat tire in the trunk wellvertically as shown.

Remove the tool box from thetrunk well, and replace the jack,wheel wrench, and extension inthe tool box.

Place the tool box into the sparetire shelf in the trunk.

Replace the spare tire cover.Secure it with the three clips. Pusheach clip in securely, and pivot thering down flat. Your vehicle’s original tire has a

tire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).155

17.

18.

16.

14.

15.

Changing a Flat Tire

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

205

CLIPS

SPARE TIRE COVERTOOL BOX

07/07/25 17:54:37 31S2A680 0210 

2008 S2000

Page 209: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place, set the parkingbrake, and thoroughly examine thetire for a puncture or other damage.

If a puncture is wider than 3/16thsof an inch (4 mm), or outside of thetire tread, do not attempt to repairthe tire. Have your vehicle towed toa Honda service center.

If the damage is smaller than3/16ths of an inch (4 mm) andwithin the tire tread, proceed withthe following instructions.

Position the vehicle so the tirevalve on the flat tire is at thebottom of the wheel, then removethe tire valve cap.

When making a temporary repair,carefully follow all instructions inthis owner’s manual and in theinstructions that came with the kit.

The wheel rim is not damaged.

The puncture is located within thetread.

The puncture is smaller than3/16ths of an inch (4 mm).

Only one tire is flat.

To reduce weight, your vehicle isequipped with a tire repair kitinstead of a spare tire. This kit willallow you to temporarily repair a flattire under the following conditions:

1.

CR models only

Repairing a Flat Tire

How to Use the Tire Repair Kit

206

VALVE CAP

TIRE VALVE

07/07/25 17:54:45 31S2A680 0211 

2008 S2000

Page 210: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

Open the trunk and remove thetire repair kit.

Your tire repair kit contains:

An air pump with a power cordand an air hose attached.

Remove the sealant bottle andcheck the expiration date on thelabel. If the date has expired, donot continue. Have your vehicletowed to the nearest Hondaservice center.

If the date has not expired, shakethe bottle thoroughly and proceedto step 4.

A bottle of sealant with a fillerhose attached.

An instruction sheet.

Two labels, one for the tire wheeland one for the instrument panel.

3.2.

Repairing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

207

TOOL BOX LID

TIRE REPAIR KIT EXPIRATION DATE

07/07/25 17:54:55 31S2A680 0212 

2008 S2000

Page 211: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Screw the sealant filler hose ontothe tire valve. Make sure thebottle remains upright to ensureall of the sealant flows into the tire.

Unscrew the bottle cap from thebottle adapter.

Remove the air pump from therepair kit, then screw the air pumphose onto the bottle adapter.Make sure the hose is secure.

Route the power cord into thevehicle, and insert the plug intothe accessory power socket.

Turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

Repairing a Flat Tire

208

TIRE VALVE

BOTTLE HOSE

BOTTLE CAP ADAPTER

AIR PUMP

PLUG

ACCESSORY SOCKET

BOTTLECAP

AIR PUMP HOSE

07/07/25 17:55:04 31S2A680 0213 

2008 S2000

Page 212: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

Turn the air pump switch ON. Theair pressure gauge will show 40 to60 psi for the first few minutes,then the pressure will go down toabout 10 to 20 psi.

Inflate the tire to 32 psi, then turnthe air pump switch OFF. If the airpressure exceeds 32 psi, push thedeflate button until the pressurereaches the recommended level.Do not use the air pump for morethan 15 minutes, or the pump may

overheat.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Remove the sealant bottle hosefrom the tire valve, then reinstallthe tire valve cap.

Push the deflate button on the airpump until the air pressure gaugeshows 0 psi.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Repairing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

209

AIR PUMP SWITCH

ON

DEFLATE BUTTON

AIR PRESSURE GAUGE

OFF

07/07/25 17:55:11 31S2A680 0214 

2008 S2000

Page 213: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Remove the wheel label from therepair kit and attach it to thecenter of the wheel.

Remove the instrument panel labelfrom the repair kit and place it asshown above.

Remove the power plug from theaccessory power socket.

Return all items except the airpump to the repair kit, and storethe kit in the tool box. Keep the airpump handy as you will need itsoon.

Begin driving at no more than 50mph (80 km/h).

After 10 minutes, stop safely anduse the air pump to check thepressure in the tire (see page ).

Your vehicle’s tire has a tirepressure monitoring systemsensor. To repair a tire with thetire repair kit, refer to

(see page ).

14. 15.

16.

17.

19.

18.

207

20.

156

Repairing a Flat Tire

Repairinga Tire with TPMS

210

WHEEL LABEL

LABEL

07/07/25 17:55:20 31S2A680 0215 

2008 S2000

Page 214: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Remove the tire valve cap, screw theair pump hose onto the tire valve,and check the air gauge. (You do notneed to attach the power cord orturn the air pump switch on.)

If the pressure is at 32 psi, continuedriving to the nearest service station.

In any case, be sure to have thedamaged tire permanently repairedor replaced as soon as possible.

Remember to return the tire sealantbottle to your Honda service centerfor proper disposal.

If the pressure is lower than 32 psiand higher than 19 psi, use the airpump to bring air to the desired levelas described in step 10. Then driveto the nearest service station.

If the pressure is below 19 psi, do notcontinue. Have the vehicle towed(see page ).228

Repairing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

211

AIR PUMP HOSE

TIRE VALVEVALVE CAP

07/07/25 17:55:27 31S2A680 0216 

2008 S2000

Page 215: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you pressthe ENGINE START button.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you press the ENGINESTART button, you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Press the ENGINE START button,then release it. If the headlights donot dim, check the condition of thefuses. If the fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualified mechanicto determine the problem. (See

on page .)

214

228

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Won’t Start

212

07/07/25 17:55:34 31S2A680 0217 

2008 S2000

Page 216: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you press theENGINE START button, but theengine does not run.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified mechanic to find theproblem. Seeon page .

63

146

196

214 228

222

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Won’t StartTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

213

07/07/25 17:55:41 31S2A680 0218 

2008 S2000

Page 217: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions. Open the hood, and check the

physical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral, and setthe parking brake.

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

3.

1.

2.

Jump Starting

214

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

07/07/25 17:55:49 31S2A680 0219 

2008 S2000

Page 218: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The reading on your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.If it reaches the red mark, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge reading reaching the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.Connect the second jumper cable

to the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

6.

7.

5.

4.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

215

Driving with the temperature gaugereading at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

07/07/25 17:55:58 31S2A680 0220 

2008 S2000

Page 219: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral,and set the parking brake. Turnoff the all accessories, and turn onthe hazard warning indicators.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark(see onpage ).

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

173

228Emergency

Towing

Adding Engine Coolant

If the Engine Overheats

216

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

07/07/25 17:56:05 31S2A680 0221 

2008 S2000

Page 220: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the readingreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

9.

8.7. 10.

11.

228Emergency

Towing

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

217

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

07/07/25 17:56:11 31S2A680 0222 

2008 S2000

Page 221: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

1.

2.

3.

4.

170

131

228

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

218

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

07/07/25 17:56:21 31S2A680 0223 

2008 S2000

Page 222: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may go off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by a dealer as soon aspossible.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).245

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness CodesEmissions Testing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

219

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

07/07/25 17:56:28 31S2A680 0224 

2008 S2000

Page 223: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, and as a reminderto check the parking brake. It willstay on if you do not fully release theparking brake.

178

228Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

220

CanadaU.S.

07/07/25 17:56:34 31S2A680 0225 

2008 S2000

Page 224: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Locate the electrical connector forthe convertible top motor.It is under the lower corner of thedashboard on the passenger’s side.Disconnect the connector bypushing the tab and pulling theconnector down.

Holding each corner of theconvertible top, raise the top andpush it forward as far as it will go.

Follow steps 4 through 6 of theclosing procedure on page .

Try closing the convertible top. Ifthe new fuse blows immediately orthe convertible top still does notoperate, you can close it manually.

Check the fuse for the convertibletop motor (see page ). If thefuse is blown, replace it with oneof the same or lower rating.

If the electric motor will not closethe convertible top, do the following.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.76

222

Except CR models

Closing the Convertible TopTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

221

CONNECTOR

07/07/25 17:56:42 31S2A680 0226 

2008 S2000

Page 225: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The primary under-hood fuse box ison the passenger’s side next to thebattery. To open it, push the two tabsas shown.

The auxiliary under-hood fuse box ison the driver’s side, near the brakefluid reservoir. To open it, push thetab on each side, and remove the lid.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe dashboard on the driver’s side.To open it, turn the knob.

Fuses

222

INTERIOR

UNDER-HOOD(PRIMARY)

UNDER-HOOD(AUXILIARY)

KNOB

07/07/25 17:56:49 31S2A680 0227 

2008 S2000

Page 226: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages and , or thediagram on the fuse box lid, whichfuse or fuses control that device.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse boxes and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the interior fusebox.

1.

2.

3. 4.

226 227

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

223

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

07/07/25 17:56:57 31S2A680 0228 

2008 S2000

Page 227: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

6.

5.

Fuses

224

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

07/07/25 17:57:03 31S2A680 0229 

2008 S2000

Page 228: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘CODE’’ (U.S. model) or‘‘Code’’ (Canadian model) in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code(see page ).

If the fuse for the instrument panelis removed, the clock setting in theinstrument panel will be canceled. Toreset the time, see page .

123

56

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

225

07/07/25 17:57:07 31S2A680 0230 

2008 S2000

Page 229: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

No.No. Amps. Circuits Protected Amps. Circuits Protected

1415161718192021

222324252627

1

2345678910111213

7.5 A

15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A20 A7.5 A15 A7.5 A

7.5 A15 A10 A

Windshield Wiper,Auto Stop SignalWasher MotorIGP (DBW)IGP (LAF)Accessory SocketWindshield WiperTurn Signal LightACGMeter, Backup LightsNot usedEngine StartFuel Pump, SRSSRS

10 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A

7.5 A20 A20 A15 A15 A15 A

Daytime Running LightsKeyless EntryBack-upInterior LightSmall LightsRadioTPMSHeater Control,Cooling Fan RelayPower MirrorsRight Power WindowLeft Power WindowIG CoilLAFDBW

: if equipped

Fuse Locations

226

IINNTTEERRIIOORR FFUUSSEE BBOOXX

07/07/25 17:57:14 31S2A680 0231 

2008 S2000

Page 230: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

**

No. No.

Amps. Circuits ProtectedNo.

Amps. Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected

12345678910111213

141516171819202122232425

20 A

70 A

Rear Window DefoggerNot usedEPSNot used

1234

40 A20 A20 A30 A20 A40 A20 A20 A

20 A15 A10 A30 A

15 A20 A30 A30 A

100 A40 A

Magnetic Clutch RelayRight HeadlightACG SHazard Warning LightsCooling FanNot usedStopLeft HeadlightVSA F/SVSA MotorBatteryIG1 Main

Lighting 1 RelayLighting 2 RelayHorn RelayPower Window MotorRight Soft Top MotorAccessory SocketBackup ACCLeft Soft Top MotorHeater MotorCondenser FanDBWCondenser Fan RelayCooling Fan Relay

1 : Except CR models2 : if equipped

2

1

1

2

2

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

227

AUXILIARY FUSE BOX

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOXES:

PRIMARY FUSE BOX

07/07/25 17:57:21 31S2A680 0232 

2008 S2000

Page 231: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see the previouscolumn).

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchors in the front and rearbumpers.

To use the towing hook:Remove the cover from thebumper.

Using the wheel nut wrench,fasten the extension into the bolthole in the anchor.

Remove the towing hook, hookextension, and wheel nut wrenchfrom the tool box.

1.

2.

3.

Emergency Towing

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

228

07/07/25 17:57:31 31S2A680 0233 

2008 S2000

Page 232: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Screw the towing hook into theextension, and tighten it securelyusing the wheel nut wrench.

4.

If Your Vehicle Gets StuckTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

229

TIRE WHEEL WRENCH

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

07/07/25 17:57:36 31S2A680 0234 

2008 S2000

Page 233: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

230

07/07/25 17:57:39 31S2A680 0235 

2008 S2000

Page 234: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 232................................Specifications . 234

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 236

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 236.................................Treadwear . 236

......................................Traction . 236.............................Temperature . 237

.................................Tire Labeling . 238Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 240

.......................Emissions Controls . 242.....................The Clean Air Act . 242

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 242

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 242

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 242

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 243....................PGM-FI System . 243

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 243

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 243

....................Replacement Parts . 243..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 244

........................Emissions Testing . 245

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

231

07/07/25 17:57:42 31S2A680 0236 

2008 S2000

Page 235: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

232

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

07/07/25 17:57:46 31S2A680 0237 

2008 S2000

Page 236: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The transmission number is on alabel underneath the transmission.

The engine number is stamped onthe front right corner of the engineblock, below the valve cover.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

233

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

07/07/25 17:57:51 31S2A680 0238 

2008 S2000

Page 237: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Specifications

234

Dimensions

Engine

Weights

Capacities

Seating Capacities

162.0 in (4,115 mm)68.9 in (1,750 mm)50.6 in (1,285 mm)94.5 in (2,400 mm)57.9 in (1,470 mm)59.4 in (1,510 mm)

132 cu-in (2,157 cm )11.1 : 1

3.43 x 3.57 in (87.0 x 90.7 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Water cooled 4-stroke DOHCVTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Spark Plug Gap 0.04 in (1.1 mm)PK22PR-L11SPFR7G-11S

Gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR)

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine0.16 US gal (0.6 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

Fuel tankEngine coolant

Engine oil

ManualtransmissionfluidDifferentialfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

6.3 US qt (6.0 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )0.81 US qt (0.77 )0.78 US qt (0.74 )

1.7 US qt (1.6 )1.6 US qt (1.5 )5.9 US qt (5.6 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )5.1 US qt (4.8 )

2.01 US gal (7.6 )1.72 US gal (6.5 )

13.2 US gal (50 )

TotalFront

22

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

NGK :DENSO :

ChangeTotalChange

Including filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotalU.S. VehiclesCanadianVehicles0 mm

0.1 mm

1

2

07/07/25 17:58:08 31S2A680 0239 

2008 S2000

Page 238: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

--

- -

-----

-----

--

**

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

235

BatteryLights

Fuses

Tires

Alignment

Air conditioning

55 W12 V 12 V 36 AH/5 HR35 W12 V

CapacityHeadlights

Front turn signal lightsRear turn signal lightsFront side marker/parking lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightInterior lightTrunk lightSide turn signal lights

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

21 W5 W5 W5 W5 W

12 V12 V12 V

21 W21 W5 W Under-hood

Interior

0.15 in (3.7 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

12 V 45 AH/20 HR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )T125/70D16 96M255/40R17 94W245/40R17 91W215/45R17 87W

Toe

Camber

Caster 6°1°30’0°30’

0.22 in (5.6 mm)On vehicles with high voltage discharge type headlights,replacement of a headlight bulb should be performed by your dealer.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type SP-10

21.2 22.9 oz (600 650 g)HFC-134a (R-134a)

See page 227 or the fuse boxcover.See page 226 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.

(H1)

(AMBER)

FrontRear

Spare TireFrontRearSpare Tire

in

HighLow

FrontRear

FrontRearFront

in:

1 : Except CR models2 : CR models

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

07/07/26 09:34:00 31S2A680 0240 

2008 S2000

Page 239: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

236

07/07/25 17:58:38 31S2A680 0241 

2008 S2000

Page 240: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature

TechnicalInform

ation

237

07/07/25 17:58:42 31S2A680 0242 

2008 S2000

Page 241: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

R

DOT

B97R

17

215

45

87

W

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)

Tire Size

238

(3)

(4)

Tire Labeling Example

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)(3)(4)

(1) Tire SizeTire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

215/45R17 87W

07/07/25 17:58:55 31S2A680 0243 

2008 S2000

Page 242: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

WeekYear

FW6X

2202

Max Press

Max Load

Tire Labeling

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

TechnicalInform

ation

239

07/07/25 17:59:02 31S2A680 0244 

2008 S2000

Page 243: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

240

07/07/25 17:59:08 31S2A680 0245 

2008 S2000

Page 244: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal ExplanationTechnicalInform

ation

241

07/07/25 17:59:14 31S2A680 0246 

2008 S2000

Page 245: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons.Controlling the production of NOx,CO, and HC is important to theenvironment. Under certainconditions of sunlight and climate,NOx and HC react to formphotochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

242

07/07/25 17:59:22 31S2A680 0247 

2008 S2000

Page 246: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, and threeway catalytic converter. These threesystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Theengine control module (ECM) usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. Itthen controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement PartsIgnition Timing Control System

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

243

07/07/25 17:59:30 31S2A680 0248 

2008 S2000

Page 247: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

244

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

07/07/25 17:59:37 31S2A680 0249 

2008 S2000

Page 248: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

Keep the vehicle in Neutral.Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

245

07/07/25 17:59:45 31S2A680 0250 

2008 S2000

Page 249: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway in6th. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

9.

7. 8.

Emissions Testing

246

07/07/25 17:59:50 31S2A680 0251 

2008 S2000

Page 250: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

....Customer Service Information . 248....................Warranty Coverages . 249

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 250

.....................Authorized Manuals . 251

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

247

07/07/25 17:59:53 31S2A680 0252 

2008 S2000

Page 251: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle identification number (seepage )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, andtelephone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

232

Customer Service Information

248

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

07/07/26 09:34:11 31S2A680 0253 

2008 S2000

Page 252: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100% credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

all exterior body panelsare covered for rust-through fromthe inside for the specified timeperiod with no mileage limit.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2008 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2008 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

249

07/07/25 18:00:10 31S2A680 0254 

2008 S2000

Page 253: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

250

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

07/07/25 18:00:15 31S2A680 0255 

2008 S2000

Page 254: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online atIf you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

251

Publication

Form Number

61S2A08

61S2A08EL

61S2A30

31S2A680

31S2AM30

31S2AQ50

HON-R

Form Description

2000-2008 Honda S2000 Service Manual

2000-2008 Honda S2000

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2000-2008 Honda S2000 Body Repair Manual

2008 Honda S2000 Owner’s Manual

2008 Honda S2000 Honda Service History

2008 Honda S2000 Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate

Year and Model Desired

www. helminc. com

07/07/25 18:00:24 31S2A680 0256 

2008 S2000

Page 255: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

252

07/07/25 18:00:26 31S2A680 0257 

2008 S2000

Page 256: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 136ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 64...............Accessory Power Socket . 90

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 170...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 20

........Air Conditioning System . 96, 100...................................Usage . 98, 102

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 190

.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 128AM/FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 107......................................Antifreeze . 173

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 45, 151

...................................Operation . 150.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 64

..........................Anti-theft System . 123......................................Audio Panel . 91

................................Audio System . 104...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 18

.............Automatic Speed Control . 124

........Back-up Light Replacement . 183Battery

Charging System...........................Indicator . 46, 218

............................Jump Starting . 214..............................Maintenance . 195............................Specifications . 235

..............................Before Driving . 127....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 16

.............................Beverage Holder . 90..................................Booster Seats . 38

............................................Brakes . 149...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 150

.............Break-in, New Linings . 128...........................................Fluid . 178

.........................................Parking . 88..........................System Design . 150

.................System Indicator . 46, 226........................Wear Indicators . 150

.............................Braking System . 149.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 128

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 60........................Brights, Headlights . 59

.........................Bulb Replacement . 179..........................Back-up Lights . 183

.................................Headlights . 179...........Side Turn Signal Lights . 182

............................Specifications . 235....................Turn Signal Lights . 181

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 179

............................Capacities Chart . 234.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 41

....................Cargo, How to Carry . 138.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

.........................................CD Care . 117...................................CD Changer . 116

.....CD Changer Error Messages . 121.........CD Player Error Messages . 120

.......................................CD Player . 114........................Certification Label . 232

.................................Chains, Tires . 194....................Changing a Flat Tire . 201

Index

BA

C

IND

EX

I

07/07/25 18:00:32 31S2A680 0258 

2008 S2000

Page 257: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

..............................Economy, Fuel . 133

Changing Oil........................................How to . 171......................................When to . 161

...Charging System Indicator . 46, 218............Checklist, Before Driving . 145

.....................................Child Safety . 29..............................Booster Seats . 38

...................................Child Seats . 34.....Important Safety Reminders . 32

..........................Larger Children . 37.......................Risk with Airbags . 30

.............................Small Children . 33.......................................Child Seats . 34

.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 184.................................................Clock . 56

...................................Clutch Fluid . 178........................CO in the Exhaust . 242

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 146......................Compact Spare Tire . 200

...............Consumer Information . 248.............Controls, Instruments and . 43

..............................Convertible Top . 72...............Convertible Top Cover . 74

..Lowering the Convertible Top . 72................................Maintenance . 77

.....Raising the Convertible Top . 76

............................Wind Deflector . 75Coolant

........................................Adding . 173....................................Checking . 132

.........................Proper Solution . 173...................Temperature Gauge . 55

Crankcase Emission Control........................................System . 242

................Cruise Control Indicator . 47............Cruise Control Operation . 124

......................................Cup Holder . 90.............Customer Service Office . 248

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 44

..............Dashboard Lower Pocket . 92................Daytime Running Lights . 59

Daytime Running Lights.......................................Indicator . 48

.................................Dead Battery . 214.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 250

................Defogger, Rear Window . 61

........Defrosting the Windows . 99, 103..........................Differential Fluid . 177

....................................Dimensions . 234...............Dimming the Headlights . 59

Dipstick..................................Engine Oil . 131

..........................Directional Signals . 59........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 150

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 173...................Do Not Tow a Trailer . 153

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 65

.......................Monitor Indicator . 47......................Power Door Locks . 65

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 236Downshifting, Manual

.............................Transmission . 147...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 143....................................Economy . 133

........................Driving Guidelines . 144..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 185

Index

D

E

II

07/07/26 09:35:02 31S2A680 0259 

2008 S2000

Page 258: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 133.........................................Gasoline . 128...........................................Gauge . 54

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 49................Octane Requirement . 128

........................Tank, Refueling . 129

............................Fan, Interior . 97, 101...........................................Features . 95

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 129Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 185...............................................Oil . 171

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 60...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 201...................Flat Tire, Repairing a . 206

Fluids..........................................Brake . 178

.........................................Clutch . 178..............Manual Transmission . 176

..................Windshield Washer . 175..........................Four-way Flashers . 60

.................................................Fuel . 128......................Fill Door and Cap . 129

...........................................Gauge . 54.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 49

................Octane Requirement . 128...............................Oxygenated . 128

........................Tank, Refueling . 129...............................Fuel Economy . 133

..............Fuel Station Procedures . 129.....................Fuses, Checking the . 223

..................................Emergencies . 199.............Battery, Jump Starting . 214...........Brake System Indicator . 220

................Changing a Flat Tire . 201.....Charging System Indicator . 218

..................Checking the Fuses . 223...Closing the Convertible Top . 221

.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 60............................Jump Starting . 214

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 218...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 210

..................Overheated Engine . 215.......................................Towing . 228

...........................Emergency Brake . 88......................Emergency Flashers . 60

......................Emergency Towing . 228............Emergency Trunk Opener . 66

.......................Emissions Controls . 242.............Emissions Testing, State . 245

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 173

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 55.........................If It Won’t Start . 212

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 47, 219

.......................Oil Life Indicator . 161

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 46, 218

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 170...............................Overheating . 215

............................Specifications . 234

............................Speed Limiter . 148...............................Start Button . 146

.......................................Starting . 146......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 128

...Evaporative Emission Controls . 242...............................Exhaust Fumes . 41

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 14

Index

F

G

IND

EX

III

07/07/26 09:35:09 31S2A680 0260 

2008 S2000

Page 259: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

.............................................Gauges . 53...Engine Coolant Temperature . 55

...............................................Fuel . 54Gearshift Lever Positions

..............Manual Transmission . 148Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

.............................(GVWR) . 139, 234

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 179.......................Hardtop, Removable . 78

...................................Installation . 79.......................................Removal . 84

..........................................Storing . 86.......................................Washing . 86

............................Wind Deflecter . 75..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 60

Headlights........................................Aiming . 179

............Daytime Running Lights . 59..................High Beam Indicator . 49

...........................Reminder Tone . 59........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 199

...................................Turning on . 59.....................................Heating . 96, 100

.Heating and Cooling System . 96, 100............................High Beam Lever . 59

.......................Hood, Opening the . 130..................................................Horn . 57

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 178

Identification Number,.......................................Vehicle . 232

Ignition..............................................Keys . 62

...........................................Switch . 64............Timing Control System . 243

........................Immobilizer System . 63.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

Indicators..............ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 47

Brake (Parking and Brake............................System) . 46, 220

................Charging System . 46, 220.............................Cruise Control . 47

....................................Door-open . 47DRL(Daytime Running

......................................Lights) . 48

EPS (Electrical Power..................................Steering) . 48...................................High Beam . 49

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 49......................................Low Fuel . 49

................Low Oil Pressure . 46, 218..............Low Tire Pressure . 51, 240

...............Maintenance Required . 50Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 47, 219..................................Peak Power . 52

.......................................Seat Belt . 46...............................................SRS . 47

...........................TPMS System . 240..................................Trunk-open . 47

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 48

..VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) . 50.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 46

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 189........Recommended Pressures . 190

...................................Inside Mirror . 87.............................Inspection, Tire . 190

....................Installing a Child Seat . 34............................Instrument Panel . 45

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 60

Index

I

H

IV

07/07/25 18:00:46 31S2A680 0261 

2008 S2000

Page 260: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

.................................Interior Lights . 92........................................Introduction . i

..................................................Keys . 62..................................Maintenance . 159

........................................Minder . 160.........................Minder Indicator . 50

Owner’s Maintenance...................................Checks . 167

..........................................Safety . 160.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 47, 225

...................Manual Transmission . 147........Manual Transmission Fluid . 176

...............................Meters, Gauges . 53...................Methanol in Gasoline . 128

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 87...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 137

................Jacking Up the Vehicle . 202.......................................Jack, Tire . 201

................................Jump Starting . 214

.......................Label, Certification . 232.................Lane Change, Signaling . 59

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 12, 17Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 179..................................Turn Signal . 59

....................................Load Limits . 139......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 64

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 64

............................Fuel Fill Door . 129

.................................Power Door . 65...........................................Trunk . 65

........................Low Coolant Level . 132.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 49

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 46, 218...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 234

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 138

..................New Vehicle Break-in . 128.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 148

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 232

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 128.........................................Odometer . 53

...............................Odometer, Trip . 53Oil

........................Change, How to . 171......................Change, When to . 161......................Checking Engine . 131..............Pressure Indicator . 46, 218

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 171

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 64Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 242.........................Opening the Trunk . 65

..............................Outside Mirrors . 87

Index

M

N

O

L

K

J

IND

EX

V

07/07/25 18:00:54 31S2A680 0262 

2008 S2000

Page 261: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

....Outside Temperature Indicator . 55....................Overheating, Engine . 215

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 167.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 128

..............Panel Brightness Control . 60...........................................Parking . 149

.................................Parking Brake . 88Parking Brake and Brake System

.....................................Indicator . 220.................................Parking Lights . 59

.....................Peak Power Indicator . 52.............................PGM-FI System . 243

...................................Pollen Filter . 185..........................Power Door Locks . 65

..................Power Socket Location . 90..............................Power Windows . 70

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 14........................Preparing to Drive . 145

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 10...Additional Safety Precautions . 15

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 14........................Protecting Children . 29

.....................General Guidelines . 29

.......Protecting Larger Children . 37.........Protecting Small Children . 33

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 16.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 250

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 42

..............................Safety Messages . iii

...................Radiator Overheating . 215.............Radio/CD Sound System . 104

.................Radio Theft Protection . 123...................Readiness Codes . 219, 245

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 183............................Rear View Mirror . 87

.................Rear Window Defogger . 61................Reclining the Seat-backs . 69

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 148Recovery Vehicle, Emergency

.......................................Towing . 228........................................Refueling . 129

.......................Reminder Indicators . 45

.......................Remote Transmitter . 67........................Removable Hardtop . 78

...................................Installation . 79.......................................Removal . 84

..........................................Storing . 86.......................................Washing . 86

............................Wind Deflector . 75

Replacement Information..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 185

................Engine Oil and Filter . 171..........................................Fuses . 222

................................Light Bulbs . 179....................................Schedule . 168

...........................................Tires . 192.............................Wiper Blades . 186

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 18

..........Reporting Safety Defects . 250Reserve Tank, Engine

...............................Coolant . 132, 173...............................Restraint, Child . 29...........................Reverse Lockout . 148

................................Rotation, Tire . 191

Index

S

R

P

VI

07/07/26 09:35:17 31S2A680 0263 

2008 S2000

Page 262: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

CONTINUED

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 16...............Additional Information . 16

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 14Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 18.....................................Cleaning . 184

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17................................Maintenance . 18

Reminder Indicator and................................Beeper . 16, 46

...................System Components . 16...............Use During Pregnancy . 14

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 69...............................Serial Number . 232

...................Service Intervals . 167, 168

...........................Service Manual . 251.........Service Station Procedures . 129

............................Setting the Clock . 56Shifting

..............Manual Transmission . 147Side Turn Signal, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 182...............................Signaling Turns . 59

.....................................Snow Tires . 194................................Sound System . 104

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 190

............................Specifications . 235....................................Spark Plugs . 234

................................Specifications . 234

................................Speed Control . 124

................................Speed Limiter . 148..........SRS, Additional Information . 20

...Additional Safety Precautions . 28.............................Airbag Service . 27

......Airbag System Components . 20How the SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 25How Your Airbags

.........................................Work . 22.............................SRS Indicator . 25, 47

...................................Start Button . 146.......................Starting the Engine . 146

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 146

................With a Dead Battery . 214..............State Emissions Testing . 245

........Steam Coming from Engine . 215Steering Wheel

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 64...................Stereo Sound System . 104

....................Storing Your Vehicle . 197................................Stuck Vehicle . 228...............................Summer Tires . 194

Supplemental Restraint System..................................Servicing . 27

.........................SRS Indicator . 25, 47...................System Components . 20

..................................Synthetic Oil . 171

..........Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 183.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 199

Technical Descriptions....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 236.....Emissions Control Systems . 242

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 244

.......................Temperature Gauge . 55...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 18................Theft Protection, Radio . 123

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 244............................Time, Setting the . 56

....................................Tire Chains . 194

Index

T

IND

EX

VII

07/07/25 18:01:04 31S2A680 0264 

2008 S2000

Page 263: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 199

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 236........................Unleaded Gasoline . 128

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 173

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 139......................Vehicle Dimensions . 234

....Vehicle Identification Number . 232Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 152................VSA System Indicator . 50

...........VSA Activation Indicator . 50.........................VSA Off Switch . 153

.............................Vehicle Storage . 197...............................Ventilation . 98, 102

.................................................VIN . 232..................................Viscosity, Oil . 171

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 42

..................Warranty Coverages . 249Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 175.....................................Operation . 58

...........................................Wheels . 188............Alignment and Balance . 192

..............................Wrench, Nut . 202

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 201.................................Tire Labeling . 238

Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................................(TPMS) . 154

...Low Tire Pressure Indicator . 154........................TPMS Indicator . 155

..............................Tire Repair Kit . 206...............................................Tires . 188

..............................Air Pressure . 190...................................Balancing . 191

........................................Chains . 194.................Checking Wear . 190, 192

.................Compact Spare Tire . 200....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 236

......................................Inflation . 189..................................Inspection . 190

....................................Repairing . 206...................................Replacing . 193

........................Rotation, Do not . 192...........................................Snow . 194

............................Specifications . 235.............................Summer Tire . 194

...........................................Wear . 190...................Tools, Tire Changing . 201

Towing......................A Trailer, Do Not . 153

................Emergency Wrecker . 228..................Trailer, Do Not Tow a . 153

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level, Manual

.........................Transmission . 176...........................Fluid Selection . 176

..............Identification Number . 233Shifting the Manual

.........................Transmission . 147.....................................Treadwear . 236.......................................Trip Meter . 53

................................................Trunk . 65........Emergency Trunk Opener . 66

.................................Opening the . 65.............Open Monitor Indicator . 47

....................................Turn Signals . 59

Index

U

V

W

VIII

07/07/26 09:35:25 31S2A680 0265 

2008 S2000

Page 264: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

.......................Wind Deflector . 99, 101....Windows, Operating the Power . 70

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 58.............................Defroster . 99, 103

.......................................Washers . 58Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 186.....................................Operation . 58

....................................Worn Tires . 193.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 228

: U.S. only

IndexIN

DE

X

IX

07/07/25 18:01:13 31S2A680 0266 

2008 S2000

Page 265: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

07/07/25 18:01:15 31S2A680 0267 

2008 S2000

Page 266: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

07/07/25 18:01:17 31S2A680 0268 

2008 S2000

Page 267: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:Recommended Engine Oil:

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Differential Fluid:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

5.1 US qt (4.8 )

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Capacity:1.7 US qt (1.6 )

API premium grade 10W-30detergent oil (see page ).

13.2 US gal (50 )

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

SAE 90 viscosity hypoid gear oil.API service classified GL5 or GL6only (see page ).

Fluid change capacity:0.78 US qt (0.74 )

170

176

178

177

07/07/25 18:01:32 31S2A680 0269 

2008 S2000

Page 268: Introduction - American Honda Motor Companytechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/A2A0808OM/enu/A2A... · 2014-05-06 · Introduction WARNING: Thisvehicleisequippedwithoneor moredevicescommonly

This owner’s manual should beconsidered a permanent part of thevehicle and should remain with thevehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers allmodels of the S2000. You may finddescriptions of equipment andfeatures that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specificationsincluded in this publication were ineffect at the time of approval forprinting. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or changespecifications or design at any timewithout notice and withoutincurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

07/07/25 17:27:02 31S2A680 0001 

2008 S2000